Samsung UN55B8500XF User manual
Add to My manuals296 Pages
Samsung UN55B8500XF is here to give you a whole new viewing experience. With its awe-inspiring design, incredible picture quality, and smart features, this TV will transform your living room into a home theater. The UN55B8500XF features a 55-inch LED display with a 1080p resolution, delivering stunning visuals with sharp details and vibrant colors. The built-in speakers produce crystal-clear audio, immersing you in your favorite movies, shows, and games. Smart TV capabilities allow you to access streaming services, browse the web, and control your TV with your voice using Bixby or Alexa. With its sleek design and innovative features, the Samsung UN55B8500XF is the perfect TV for any home.
advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of
296
Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care center. Comuníquese con SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE Si desea formular alguna pregunta o comentario en relación con los productos de Samsung, comuníquese con el centro de atención al cliente de SAMSUNG. Comment contacter Samsung dans le monde Si vous avez des suggestions ou des questions concernant les produits Samsung, veuillez contacter le Service Consommateurs Samsung. Country Customer Care Center Web Site CANADA 1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/ca U.S.A 1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/us Address Samsung Electronics Canada Inc., Customer Service 55 Standish Court Mississauga, Ontario L5R 4B2 Canada Samsung Electronique Canada Inc., Service à la Clientèle 55 Standish Court Mississauga, Ontario L5R 4B2 Canada Samsung Electronics America, Inc. 105 Challenger Road Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660-0511 LED TV user manual imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive more complete service, please register your product at www.samsung.com/register Model Serial No. BN68-02322C-01 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 1 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:13 ❑ Important Warranty Information Regarding Television Format Viewing N See the warranty card for more information on warranty terms. Wide screen format LED Displays (16:9, the aspect ratio of the screen width to height) are primarily designed to view wide screen format full-motion video. The images displayed on them should primarily be in the wide screen 16:9 ratio format, or expanded to fill the screen if your model offers this feature and the images are constantly moving. Displaying stationary graphics and images on screen, such as the dark sidebars on nonexpanded standard format television video and programming, should be limited to no more than 5% of the total television viewing per week. Additionally, viewing other stationary images and text such as stock market reports, video game displays, station logos, web sites or computer graphics and patterns, should be limited as described above for all televisions. Displaying stationary images that exceed the above guidelines can cause uneven aging of LED Displays that leave subtle, but permanent burned-in ghost images in the LED picture. To avoid this, vary the programming and images, and primarily display full screen moving images, not stationary patterns or dark bars. On LED models that offer picture sizing features, use these controls to view different formats as a full screen picture. Be careful in the selection and duration of television formats used for viewing. Uneven LED aging as a result of format selection and use, as well as burned-in images, are not covered by your Samsung limited warranty. ● SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICAN LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT Subject to the requirements, conditions, exclusions and limitations of the original Limited Warranty supplied with Samsung Electronics (SAMSUNG) products, and the requirements, conditions, exclusions and limitations contained herein, SAMSUNG will additionally provide Warranty Repair Service in the United States on SAMSUNG products purchased in Canada, and in Canada on SAMSUNG products purchased in the United States, for the warranty period originally specified, and to the Original Purchaser only. The above described warranty repairs must be performed by a SAMSUNG Authorized Service Center. Along with this Statement, the Original Limited Warranty Statement and a dated Bill of Sale as Proof of Purchase must be presented to the Service Center. Transportation to and from the Service Center is the responsibility of the purchaser. Conditions covered are limited only to manufacturing defects in material or workmanship, and only those encountered in normal use of the product. Excluded, but not limited to, are any originally specified provisions for, in-home or on-site services, minimum or maximum repair times, exchanges or replacements, accessories, options, upgrades, or consumables. For the location of a SAMSUNG Authorized Service Center, please call toll-free: N In the United States : 1-800-SAMSUNG (1-800-726-7864) N In Canada : 1-800-SAMSUNG ❑ Precautions When Displaying a Still Image A still image may cause permanent damage to the TV screen ● Do not display a still image on the LED panel for more than 2 hours as it can cause screen image retention. This image retention is also known as screen burn. To avoid such image retention, reduce the degree of brightness and contrast of the screen when displaying a still image. ● Watching the LED TV in 4:3 format for a long period of time may leave traces of borders displayed on the left, right and center of the screen caused by the difference of light emission on the screen. Playing a DVD or a game console may cause a similar effect to the screen. Damages caused by the above effect are not covered by the Warranty. ● Displaying still images from Video games and PC for longer than a certain period of time may produce partial after-images. To prevent this effect, reduce the ‘brightness’ and ‘contrast’ when displaying still images. © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 1 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:13 Setting up Your TV ■ List of Features................................................................................... 2 ■ Accessories........................................................................................ 2 ■ Viewing the Control Panel.................................................................. 3 ■ Viewing the Remote Control............................................................... 4 ■ Pairing the Remote Control................................................................ 5 ■ Finding the Remote Control................................................................ 5 ■ Mini Remote Control........................................................................... 6 ■ Installing Batteries in the Remote Control.......................................... 6 ■ Viewing the menus............................................................................. 7 ■ Placing Your Television in Standby Mode........................................... 8 ■ Plug & Play Feature............................................................................ 8 Connections ■ Connecting VHF and UHF Antennas.................................................. 9 ■ Connecting Cable TV....................................................................... 10 ■ Viewing the Connection Panel...........................................................11 CHANNEL ■ Channel Menu.................................................................................. 14 ■ Managing Channels.......................................................................... 15 PICTURE ■ Configuring the Picture Menu........................................................... 17 ■ Viewing Picture-in-Picture................................................................ 21 ■ Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display..................................... 22 ■ Setting up the TV with your PC........................................................ 23 SOUND ■ Configuring the Sound Menu............................................................ 24 SETUP ■ Configuring the Setup Menu............................................................. 26 ■ Setting the Time................................................................................ 29 ■ Network Connection......................................................................... 31 ■ Setting the Network.......................................................................... 34 INPUT / SUPPORT ■ Input Menu........................................................................................ 37 ■ Support Menu................................................................................... 37 ■ Movie List Option Menu.................................................................... 52 ■ Playing a Movie File......................................................................... 52 ■ Movie Play Option Menu.................................................................. 55 ■ Using the Setup Menu...................................................................... 56 English Contents Media Play-DLNA ■ Setting the DLNA Network................................................................ 57 ■ Installing the DLNA Application......................................................... 58 ■ Using the DLNA Application.............................................................. 59 ■ Using the DLNA Function................................................................. 61 ANYNET+ ■ Connecting Anynet+ Devices............................................................ 62 ■ Setting Up Anynet+. ......................................................................... 63 ■ Switching between Anynet+ Devices................................................ 63 ■ Recording......................................................................................... 64 ■ Listening through a Receiver (Home Theater)................................. 64 ■ Troubleshooting for Anynet+. ........................................................... 65 Content Library ■ Using the Content Library................................................................. 66 ■ Using the TV Memory Contents....................................................... 67 ■ Using the Content Management....................................................... 68 Internet@TV ■ Getting Started with Internet@TV..................................................... 69 ■ Editing Snippets in the Dock............................................................. 72 ■ Using the Profile Widget................................................................... 72 ■ Using the Yahoo!® Widget Gallery................................................... 74 ■ Using the Yahoo!® Weather Widget................................................. 75 ■ Using the Yahoo!® News Widget...................................................... 75 ■ Using the Yahoo!® Flickr Widget...................................................... 76 ■ Using the Yahoo!® Finance Widget.................................................. 77 ■ Troubleshooting for Internet@TV..................................................... 77 ■ Help Website.................................................................................... 77 Home Network Center ■ Home Network Center...................................................................... 78 ■ Setting Up the Home Network Center.............................................. 79 ■ Using the Message Function............................................................ 80 ■ Using the Media Function................................................................. 81 RECOMMENDATIONS Media Play (USB & DLNA) ■ Connecting a USB Device................................................................ 40 ■ Media Play Function......................................................................... 41 ■ Sorting the Photo List....................................................................... 43 ■ Photo List Option Menu.................................................................... 44 ■ Viewing a Photo or Slide Show........................................................ 45 ■ Slide Show Option Menu.................................................................. 46 ■ Sorting the Music List....................................................................... 48 ■ Music List Option Menu.................................................................... 49 ■ Playing Music................................................................................... 50 ■ Music Play Option Menu................................................................... 51 ■ Sorting the Movie List....................................................................... 51 ■ Troubleshooting................................................................................ 82 ■ Installing the Stand........................................................................... 85 ■ Disconnecting the Stand................................................................... 85 ■ Assembling the Cables..................................................................... 86 ■ Wall Mount Kit Specifications (VESA).............................................. 87 ■ Preparing before installing the Wall-Mount....................................... 88 ■ Anti-Theft Kensington Lock.............................................................. 88 ■ Securing the Installation Space........................................................ 88 ■ Securing the TV to a Wall or Cabinet............................................... 89 ■ Specifications................................................................................... 90 ■ Dimensions....................................................................................... 91 ❑ License TruSurround HD, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TruSurround HD technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content. ❑ Symbol Press N O T Note One-Touch Button TOOLS Button English - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 1 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:14 Setting up Your TV To use your TV, you first have to set it up to suit your environment. N Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from actual product appearance. Product design and specifications may be changed without notice in order to enhance product performance. ¦ List of Features ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Adjustable picture settings that can be stored in the TV’s memory. Automatic timer to turn the TV on and off. A special sleep timer. Excellent Digital Interface & Networking : With a built-in HD digital tuner, nonsubscription HD broadcasts can be viewed with no Cable Box/Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) needed. HDMI/DVI connection of your PC to this TV. Excellent Picture Quality SRS TruSurround HD provides a virtual surround system. Media Play: Allows you to play music files, pictures, and movies saved on a USB or DLNA device. Internet@TV: You can use various internet services and view useful information and entertaining content. Home Network Center: Allows you to configure a mobile message server or a DLNA media render. ¦ Accessories Remote Control (BN59-00849A) & Batteries (AAA x 2) Mini Remote Control & Lithium battery (3V) (BN59-00802A) Cover-Bottom (BN63-05654A) Warranty Card / Safety Guide Holder-Wire stand (BN61-05491A) Program CD (BN59-00726D) TV-Holder & Screw (X1) (BN96-10788B) Cleaning Cloth (BN63-01798B) Holder-Wire Cable (BN61-05596A) Holder-Ring (4ea) (BN61-05280A) Holder-Wire (3ea) (BN61-05373A) Owner’s Instructions / Quick Setup Guide (M8xL19) N Please make sure the following items are included with your LED TV. If any items are missing, contact your dealer. N The items color and shape may vary depending on the model. English - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 2 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:16 ¦ Viewing the Control Panel N The product color and shape may vary depending on the model. N The front panel buttons can be activated by touching them with your finger. 1 2 7 7 6 5 4 3 1 REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR: Aim the remote control towards this spot on the TV. 2 P (POWER): Press to turn the TV on and off. 3 z: Press to change channels. In the on-screen menu, use the z buttons as you would use the ▼ and ▲ buttons on the remote control. 4 y: Press to increase or decrease the volume. In the on-screen menu, use the y buttons as you would use the ◄ and ► buttons on the remote control. 5 MENU: Press to see an on-screen menu of your TV’s features. 6 SOURCE E: Toggles between all the available input sources. In the on-screen menu, use this button as you use the ENTERE button on the remote control. 7 SPEAKERS English - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 3 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:17 ¦ Viewing the Remote Control N The product color and shape may vary depending on the model. 1 POWER : Turns the TV on and off. 2 TV : Selects the TV mode directly. 3 NUMERIC BUTTONS : Press to change the channel. 4 _: Press to select additional channels (digital) being broadcast by the same station. For example, to select channel ‘54-3’, press ‘54’, then press ‘_’ and ‘3’. 5 CH LIST : Used to display Channel Lists on the screen. 6 TOOLS : Use to quickly select frequently used functions. 7 INTERNET@ : Press to use various internet services to view useful information and entertaining content. 8 COLOR BUTTONS : Use these buttons in the Channel list, Internet@TV, Media Play menu, etc. 9 SOURCE: Press to display and select the available video sources. 0 y : Press to increase or decrease the volume. ! CONTENT: This function enables you to view the Content Library. @ MEDIA.P: Allows you to play music files, pictures, and movies. # INFO: Press to display information on the TV screen. $ Use these buttons in the Media Play and Anynet+ modes. (∏: This remote can be used to control recording on Samsung recorders with the Anynet+ feature) % SENSING WINDOW: Senses the brightness of the room and determines whether to turn on the backlight of the remote control button or not. The Backlight enables you to find the remote buttons more easily in a dark room. ^ PRE-CH : Enables you to return to the previous channel you were watching. & MENU : Displays the main onscreen menu. * FAV.CH : Used to display Favorites Channel Lists on the screen. ( RETURN : Returns to the previous menu ) WHEEL (UP▲ / DOWN▼ / LEFT◄ / RIGHT►) / ENTERE: Press the Up/Down/Left/Right sections of the wheel button and Enter to select on-screen menu items and change menu values. You can navigate up and down the menu, switch channels and adjust the volume by turning the wheel button. a EXIT : Press to exit the menu. % 1 2 3 4 5 ^ & * 6 ( ) 7 a 8 9 0 b ! @ c d e f # $ RF g b z : Press to change channels. c MUTE M : Press to temporarily cut off the sound. d P.SIZE: Picture size selection. e MTS: Press to choose stereo, mono or Separate Audio Program (SAP broadcast). f CC: Controls the caption decoder. g PAIRING / RESET: Used for pairing the TV and the Remote Control. (see page 5) N This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. Applicant’s name : SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO,.LTD. Model name : Remote Controller IC : 649E-SWPZ01TX Applicant’s name : SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO,.LTD. Model name : Rf Transceiver IC : 649E-SWPZ01RX English - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 4 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:17 ¦ Pairing the Remote Control A process that enables two-way communication between the TV and the remote control. This enables the remote to control this TV only. ❑ Auto Pairing A method that completes the automatic pairing of the TV and the remote control. N If Auto Pairing does not work, refer to the ‘Manual Pairing’. ■ When the TV is turned off (Standby mode) 1. Press the POWER(P) button on the remote control. N The remote control enters pairing mode. 2. The TV that receives the Power command is turned on. N The TV enters pairing mode. Pairing mode is maintained until pairing is complete. 3. Pairing mode is completed. N The remote control beeps. ■ RF RF When the TV is turned on 1. Press any button on the remote control. N The remote control enters pairing mode. N After pairing is complete, the button pressed by the user transmits the corresponding command to the TV. N The time taken to complete the pairing and to send the command is less than 1 second. 2. Pairing mode is completed. N The remote control beeps. RF RF ❑ Manual Pairing You can pair the TV and the remote control so that the remote control only controls the TV. 1. Plug the TV power plug into the power outlet. N Turn the TV power switch off. RF 2. Press the PAIRING button on the remote control. N Use a sharp object to press the button. N Keep a distance of less than 3 feet (1 m) between the TV and the remote control. 3. Press the POWER(P) button on the front panel of the TV. The TV is turned on and Pairing with the remote control is completed. RF 4. Press the remote control buttons to check if the remote control is properly paired. N If the remote control does not work, attempt the pairing process again. N If the remote control does not work even after the above measures have been taken, press the RESET button, and replace the batteries. ¦ Finding the Remote Control RF 1. Press the Volume (-) button on the front panel of the TV and hold it down for 10 seconds. The TV will transmit a signal to find the remote control. 2. The remote control will generate an alarm sound for 30 seconds. Search for the remote control from the location where the sound is heard the loudest. N If no sound is heard, please try again. 3. If the remote control has been found, press any remote control button to stop the sound. English - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 5 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:18 ¦ Mini Remote Control The Mini Remote Control is a simplified remote control that consists of the power, channel and volume buttons only. 1 Power On/Off button 4 1 2 2 < : Next channel / > : Previous channel 3 3 + : Volume increase / – : Volume decrease 2 3 4 IrDA transmitter N Use the Mini Remote Control so that this part faces the TV. N The items color and shape may vary depending on the model. N CALIFORNIA USA ONLY This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Manganese Dioxide) Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California USA ‘Perchloate Material - special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate:’ ¦ Installing Batteries in the Remote Control Normal Remote Control 1. Lift the cover at the back of the remote control upward as shown in the figure. 2. Install two AAA size batteries. N Make sure to match the ‘+’ and ‘–’ ends of the batteries with the diagram inside the compartment. 3. Replace the cover. N Remove the batteries and store them in a cool, dry place if you won’t be using the remote control for a long time. (Assuming typical TV usage, the batteries should last for about one year.) Mini Remote Control 1. Turn the battery cover counterclockwise to unlock it and then separate the battery cover. 2. Insert a 3V Lithium battery. 3. Place the battery cover into the remote control, aligning it with the grooves and then turn the battery cover clockwise to lock the cover. OPEN CLOSE N If the remote control doesn’t work, check the following: Is the TV power on? Are the plus and minus ends of the batteries reversed? Are the batteries drained? Is there a power outage or is the power cord unplugged? Is there a special fluorescent light or neon sign nearby? English - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 6 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:18 ¦ Viewing the menus Before using the TV, follow the steps below to learn how to navigate the menu in order to select and adjust different functions. MENU Button Display the main on-screen menu. RETURN Button Return to the previous menu. ENTERE / WHEEL Button Move the cursor and select an item. Select the currently selected item. Confirm the setting. EXIT Exit the on-screen menu. ❑ Operating the OSD (On Screen Display) The access steps may differ depending on the selected menu. 1. Press the MENU button. Picture 2. The main menu appears on the screen. The menu’s left side has icons : Picture, Sound, Channel, Setup, Input, Application, Support. RF Mode : Standard Backlight Contrast Brightness Sharpness Color Tint (G/R) Advanced Settings :5 : 95 : 45 : 50 : 50 : G50/R50 Mode : Standard Backlight : 5 Contrast Brightness Sharpness Color Tint (G/R) Advanced Settings Picture Options : 95 : 45 : 50 : 50 : G50/R50 ▶ 3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select one of the icons. N To move to a lower menu, turn the wheel clockwise when the menu is displayed. To move to a higher menu, turn the wheel counterclockwise. 4. Press the ENTERE button to access the icon’s sub-menu. 6. Press the ◄ or ► button to decrease or increase the value of a particular item. The adjustment OSD may differ depending on the selected menu. Picture 5. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the icon’s submenu. ▲ Backlight ▼ RF ▶ 5 RF U Move L Adjust E Enter R Return Help icon 7. Press the ENTERE button to complete the configuration. Press the EXIT button to exit. English - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 7 RF 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:19 ¦ Placing Your Television in Standby Mode Your set can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce power consumption. The standby mode can be useful when you wish to interrupt viewing temporarily (during a meal, for example). 1. Press the POWERP button on the remote control. N The screen is turned off and a standby indicator appears on your set. 2. To switch your set back on, simply press the POWERP button again. N Do not leave your set in standby mode for long periods of time (when you are away on holiday, for example). It is best to unplug the set from the AC outlet and antenna. ¦ Plug & Play Feature When the TV is initially powered on, basic settings proceed automatically and subsequently. 1. Press the POWERP button on the remote control. N You can also use the POWERP button on the TV. N The Plug & Play starting message is displayed. Press the ENTERE button. N If the remote control is not functioning properly, please follow the instructions to repeat the process for pairing the remote control to the TV. Plug & Play Menu Language, Store Demo, Channels, and Time will be set. If the remote control is not functioning properly, please follow the instructions to repeat the process for pairing the remote control to the TV. 2. Press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the language, then press the ENTERE button. The message Select ‘Home Use’ when installing this TV in your home. is displayed. Start E Enter 3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Store Demo or Home Use, then press the ENTERE button. The message Select the Antenna source to memorize. is displayed. N We recommend setting the TV to Home Use mode for the best picture in your home environment. N Store Demo mode is only intended for use in retail environments. N If the unit is accidentally set to Store Demo mode and you want to return to Home Use (Standard): Press the volume button on the TV. When the volume OSD is displayed, press and hold the MENU button on the TV for 5 seconds. 4. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to memorize the channels of the selected connection. Press the ENTERE button to select Start. N Air: Air antenna signal. / Cable: Cable antenna signal. / Auto: Air and Cable antenna signals. N In Cable mode, you can select the correct signal source among STD, HRC, and IRC by pressing the ▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button, then press the ENTERE button. If you have Digital cable, select the cable system signal source for both Analog and Digital. Contact your local cable company to identify the type of cable system that exists in your particular area. 5. Press the ENTERE button to select Start. The TV will begin memorizing all of the available channels. N To stop the search before it has finished, press the ENTERE button with Stop selected. N After all the available channels are stored, it starts to remove scrambled channels. The Auto program menu then reappears. Press the ENTERE button when channel memorization is complete. The message Set the Clock Mode. is displayed. 6. Press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Auto, then press the ENTERE button. The message Set to RF daylight saving time. is displayed. If you select Manual, Set current date and time. is displayed. 7. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Off, On or Auto, then press the ENTERE button. 8. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to highlight the time zone for your local area. Press the ENTERE button. If you have received a digital signal, the time will be set automatically. If not, refer to the ‘Setting the Time’ instructions to set the clock. (see pages 29~30) 9. The description for the connection method providing the best HD screen quality is displayed. Check the description and press the ENTERE button. 10.Press the ◄ or ► button to select See Product Guide or Watch TV. Press the ENTERE button. See Product Guide: You are moved to the Product Guide where you can view the introduction to the main functions of your new HDTV. Watch TV: You can watch the memorized channels. If you want to reset this feature... 2. Press the ENTERE button again to select Plug & Play. N The Plug & Play feature is only available in the TV mode. Setup 1. Press the MENU button to display the menu. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Setup, then press the ENTERE button. Plug & Play Language Time Game Mode BD Wise Network Type Network Setup V-Chip : English ▶ : Off : On : Cable English - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 8 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:19 Connections ¦ Connecting VHF and UHF Antennas If your antenna has a set of leads that look like the diagram to the right, see ‘Antennas with 300 Ω Flat Twin Leads’ below. If your antenna has one lead that looks like the diagram to the right, see ‘Antennas with 75 Ω Round Leads’. If you have two antennas, see ‘Separate VHF and UHF Antennas’. Antennas with 300 Ω Flat Twin Leads If you are using an off-air antenna (such as a roof antenna or ‘rabbit ears’) that has 300 Ω twin flat leads, follow the directions below. 1. Place the wires from the twin leads under the screws on a 300-75 Ω adapter (not supplied). Use a screwdriver to tighten the screws. ANT IN 2. Plug the adaptor into the ANT IN terminal on the back of the TV. Antennas with 75 Ω Round Leads Plug the antenna lead into the ANT IN terminal on the back of the TV. ANT IN Separate VHF and UHF Antennas If you have two separate antennas for your TV (one VHF and one UHF), you must combine the two antenna signals before connecting the antennas to the TV. This procedure requires an optional combiner-adaptor (available at most electronics shops). 1. Connect both antenna leads to the combiner. UHF VHF 2. Plug the combiner into the ANT IN terminal on the bottom of the rear panel. UHF VHF ANT IN English - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 9 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:20 ¦ Connecting Cable TV To connect to a cable TV system, follow the instructions below. ANT IN Cable without a Cable Box Plug the incoming cable into the ANT IN terminal on the back of the TV. N Because this TV is cable-ready, you do not need a cable box to view unscrambled cable channels. Connecting to a Cable Box that Descrambles All Channels 1. Find the cable that is connected to the ANT OUT terminal on your cable box. N This terminal might be labeled ‘ANT OUT’, ‘VHF OUT’ or simply, ‘OUT’. ANT IN ANT OUT ANT IN 2. Connect the other end of this cable to the ANT IN terminal on the back of the TV. Connecting to a Cable Box that Descrambles Some Channels If your cable box descrambles only some channels (such as premium channels), follow the instructions below. You will need a twoway splitter, an RF (A/B) switch and four lengths of RF cable. (These items are available at most electronics stores.) ANT IN Incoming cable TV Rear Splitter RF (A/B) Switch Cable Box 1. Find and disconnect the cable that is connected to the ANT IN terminal on your cable box. N This terminal might be labeled ‘ANT IN’, ‘VHF IN’ or simply, ‘IN’. 2. Connect this cable to a two-way splitter. 3. Connect an RF cable between the OUTPUT terminal on the splitter and the IN terminal on the cable box. 4. Connect an RF cable between the ANT OUT terminal on the cable box and the B–IN terminal on the RF(A/B) switch. 5. Connect another cable between the other OUT terminal on the splitter and the A–IN terminal on the RF (A/B) switch. 6. Connect the last RF cable between the OUT terminal on the RF (A/B) switch and the ANT IN terminal on the rear of the TV. After you have made this connection, set the A/B switch to the ‘A’ position for normal viewing. Set the A/B switch to the ‘B’ position to view scrambled channels. (When you set the A/B switch to ‘B’, you will need to tune your TV to the cable box’s output channel, which is usually channel 3 or 4.) English - 10 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 10 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:20 ¦ Viewing the Connection Panel N The product color and shape may vary depending on the model. 1 4 or 2 3 or Cable Television Network N For best cable connection to this product, be sure to use a cables with a maximum thickness as below: ● Maximum thickness - 0.55 inches (14mm) 1 POWER INPUT Connects the supplied power cord. N The location of the POWER INPUT may be different depending on its model. 2 LAN Connect a LAN cable to this port to connect to the Network. 3 ANT IN Connects to an antenna or cable TV system. 4 HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3, 4 / PC/DVI AUDIO IN Connects to the HDMI jack of a device with an HDMI output. N No sound connection is needed for an HDMI to HDMI connection. N What is HDMI? HDMI(High-Definition Multimedia Interface), is an interface that enables the transmission of digital audio and video signals using a single cable. The difference between HDMI and DVI is that the HDMI device is smaller in size and has the HDCP (High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection) coding feature installed. N The TV may not output sound and pictures may be displayed with abnormal color when DVD / Blu-ray player / Cable Box / Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) supporting HDMI versions older than 1.3 are connected. When connecting an older HDMI cable and there is no sound, connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack and the audio cables to the PC/DVI AUDIO IN jacks on the back of the TV. If this happens, contact the company that provided the DVD / Blu-ray player / Cable Box / Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) to confirm the HDMI version, then request an upgrade. N HDMI cables that are not 1.3 may cause annoying flicker or no screen display. N Use the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack for DVI connection to an external device. Use a DVI to HDMI cable or DVI-HDMI adapter (DVI to HDMI) for video connection and the PC/DVI AUDIO IN jacks for audio. When using an HDMI / DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack. N When connecting via DVI, a separate audio connection must be made. Use a 2RCA to 3.5mm miniplug cable for this purpose. English - 11 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 11 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:21 5 7 8 R W R W R B G 6 or G 5KENSINGTON LOCK The Kensington Lock (optional) is a device used to physically fix the system when used in a public place. If you want to use a locking device, contact the dealer where you purchased the TV. N The location of the Kensington Lock may be different depending on its model. 6 COMPONENT IN / AV IN Connects Component video / audio. The COMPONENT IN jack is also used as the AV IN jack. N When connecting, match the color of the connector to the jack. N Connect the video cable to the COMPONENT IN [Y/VIDEO] jack and the audio cable to the COMPONENT IN [R-AUDIO-L] jacks. N If you have a ‘mono’ (non-stereo) VCR, use a Y-connector (not supplied) to connect to the right and left audio input jacks of the TV. Alternatively, connect the cable to the ‘R’ jack. If your VCR is stereo, you must connect two cables. N When connecting to AV IN, the color of the AV IN [Y/VIDEO] jack (Green) does not match the color of the video cable (Yellow). 7 PC/DVI AUDIO IN Connect to the audio output jack on your PC. DVI audio input from external devices. 8 PC IN Connects to the video and audio output jacks on your PC. N If your PC supports an HDMI connection, you can connect this to the HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3 or 4 terminal. N If your PC supports a DVI connection, you can connect this to the HDMI IN 1(DVI) / PC/DVI AUDIO terminal. English - 12 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 12 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:21 9 ! W R 0 0 @ 9 EX-LINK Connector for service only. 0 USB 1 (HDD) / USB 2 Connector for software upgrades and Media Play, etc. You can connect to Samsung’s network wirelessly using the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ (Sold separately). N For USB HDD, use the USB 1 (HDD) port. N Turning on or off the TV while a USB device is connected may damage the files on the USB device. ! AUDIO OUT Connects to the audio input jacks on your Amplifier/Home theater. N When connecting, use the appropriate connector (sold separately). N When an audio amplifier is connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks: Decrease the volume of the TV and adjust the volume level with the Amplifier’s volume control. @ DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) Connects to a Digital Audio component such as a Home theater receiver. N When a Digital Audio System is connected to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack: Decrease the volume of the TV and adjust the volume level with the system’s volume control. N 5.1CH audio is possible when the TV is connected to an external device supporting 5.1CH. N When the Home Theater receiver is set to On, you can hear sound output from the TV’s Optical jack. When the TV is displaying a DTV(air) signal, the TV will send out 5.1 channel sound to the Home theater receiver. When the source is a digital component such as a DVD / Blu-ray player / Cable Box / Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) and is connected to the TV via HDMI, only 2 channel sound will be heard from the Home Theater receiver. If you want to hear 5.1 channel audio, connect the digital audio out jack on DVD / Blu-ray player / Cable Box / Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) directly to an Amplifier or Home Theater, not the TV. English - 13 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 13 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:21 CHANNEL You can configure various settings for your TV channels with features such as Auto Program, Favorite Channels, and Signal Strength. ¦ Channel Menu ❑ Antenna → Air / Cable ❑ Auto Program ■ Channel Before your television can begin memorizing the available channels, you must specify the type of signal source that is connected to the TV (i.e. an Air or a Cable system). T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the Antenna by selecting Tools → Switch to Cable (or Switch to Air). Antenna : Air ▶ Auto Program Clear Scrambled Channel Channel List Fine Tune Air: Air antenna signal. / Cable: Cable antenna signal. / Auto: Air and Cable antenna signals. N When selecting Cable, the cable system must also be selected. STD, HRC and IRC identify various types of cable TV systems. Contact your local cable company to identify the type of cable system that exists in your particular area. At this point the signal source has been selected. N After all the available channels are stored, it starts to remove scrambled channels (Removing scrambled channel). The Auto program menu then reappears. N If you want to stop Auto Programming, press the ENTERE button. The Stop Auto Program? message will be displayed. Select Yes by pressing the ◄ or ► button, then press the ENTERE button. ❑ Clear Scrambled Channel (digital channels only) This function is used to filter out scrambled channels after Auto Program is completed. This process may take up to 20~30 minutes. N To stop searching scrambled channels: Press the ENTERE button to select Stop. Press the ◄ button to select Yes, then press the ENTERE button. N This function is only available in Cable mode. ❑ Channel List For detailed procedures on using the Channel List, refer to the ‘Managing Channels’ instructions. (see pages 15~16) O You can select these options by simply pressing the CH LIST button on the remote control. ❑ Fine Tune (analog channels only) Use fine tuning to manually adjust a particular channel for optimal reception. N If you do not store the fine-tuned channel in memory, adjustments are not saved. N ‘*’ will appear next to the name of fine-tuned channels. N To reset the fine tuning setting, press the ▼ button to select Reset, then press the ENTERE button. English - 14 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 14 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:21 ¦ Managing Channels ■ All Channels Shows all currently available channels. ■ Added Channels Shows all added channels. Added Channels Using this menu, you can add / delete or set favorite channels and use the program guide for digital broadcasts. Air 2 Air 4 Air 4-2 * TV #8 8 Air 13 Air 13-1 * TV #3 Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland Antenna Zoom Select T Tools ■ Favorite Shows all favorite channels. O To select the favorite channels you have set up, press the FAV.CH button on the remote control. ■ Programmed Shows all current reserved programs. N Select a channel in the All Channels, Added Channels or Favorite screen by pressing the ▲ / ▼ buttons, and pressing the ENTERE button. Then you can watch the selected channel. N Using the color buttons with the Channel List Red (Antenna): Switches to Air or Cable. Green (Zoom): Enlarges or shrinks a channel number. Yellow (Select): Selects multiple channel lists. You can perform the add/delete or add to Favorite/delete from Favorite function for multiple channels at the same time. Select the required channels and press the yellow button to set all the selected channels at the same time. The c mark appears to the left of the selected channels. TOOLS (Tools): Displays the Add (or Delete), Add to Favorite (or Delete from Favorite), Timer Viewing, Channel Name Edit, Select All (or Deselect All) and Auto Program menus (The Options menus may differ depending on the situation.) N Channel Status Display Icons c : A channel selected by pressing the yellow button. ( : A program currently being broadcast. * : A channel set as a Favorite. ) : A reserved program. Channel List Option Menu (in All Channels / Added Channels / Favorite) ■ Add / Delete You can delete or add a channel to display the channels you want. N All deleted channels will be shown on the All Channels menu. N A gray-colored channel indicates the channel has been deleted. N The Add menu only appears for deleted channels. N You can also delete a channel from the Added Channels or Favorite menu in the same manner. All Channels N Press the TOOLS button to use the option menu. N Option menu items may differ depending on the channel status. Air 2 Air 4 Air Delete Add to Favorite 4-2 * TV #8 Timer Viewing 8 Air Channel Name Edit 13 Air Select All in Wonderland 13-1 * TV #3 Alice’s Adventures Auto Program Antenna Zoom Select T Tools English - 15 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 15 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:22 ■ Add to Favorite / Delete from Favorite You can set channels you watch frequently as Favorite. T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the add to (or delete from) Favorites by selecting Tools → Add to Favorite (or Delete from Favorite). N The ‘*’ symbol will be displayed and the channel will be set as a favorite. N All favorite channels will be shown on Favorite menu. ■ Timer Viewing If you reserve a program you want to watch, the channel is automatically switched to the reserved channel in the Channel List; even when you are watching another channel. To reserve a program, set the current time first. N Only memorized channels can be reserved. N You can set the channel, day, month, year, hour and minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control. N Reserving a program will be shown in the Programmed menu. N Digital Program Guide and Viewing Reservation When a digital channel is selected, and you press the ► button, the Program Guide for the channel appears. You can reserve a program according to the procedures described above. ■ Channel Name Edit (analog channels only) Channels can be labeled so that their call letters appear whenever the channel is selected. N The names of digital broadcasting channels are automatically assigned and cannot be labeled. ■ Select All / Deselect All ● Select All: You can select all the channels in the channel list. ● Deselect All: You can deselect all the selected channels. N You can only select Deselect All when there is a selected channel. ■ Auto Program N For detailed procedures on using the Auto Program, refer to the ‘Channel Menu’ instructions. (see page 14) Channel List Option Menu (in Programmed) ■ Change Info Select to change a viewing reservation. ■ Cancel Schedules Select to cancel a viewing reservation. ■ Information Select to view a viewing reservation. (You can also change the reservation information.) ■ Select All Select all reserved programs. Programmed You can view, modify or delete a reservation. N Press the TOOLS button to use the option menu. Air 1 / 1 / 2009 1:59 5 TV1 ) Change Info Cancel Schedules Equalizer 2:59 2 TV3 ) TheInformation Select All & Wife 3:59 2 TV3 ) McMillan 4:59 2 TV3 ) M.Spillane’s mike Antenna Zoom Select T Tools E Information English - 16 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 16 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:22 PICTURE You can configure various picture options such as the picture mode, aspect ratio, and color to suit your personal preferences. ¦ Configuring the Picture Menu ❑ Mode ■ Dynamic Selects the picture for increased definition in a bright room. ■ Standard Selects the picture for the optimum display in a normal environment. ■ Natural Selects the picture for an optimum and eye-comfortable display. N Natural is not available in PC mode. ■ Movie Selects the picture for viewing movies in a dark room. Picture You can select the type of picture which best corresponds to your viewing requirements. T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the picture mode by selecting Tools → Picture Mode. Mode : Standard Backlight Contrast Brightness Sharpness Color Tint (G/R) Advanced Settings :5 : 95 : 45 : 50 : 50 : G50/R50 ▶ ❑ Backlight / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness / Color / Tint (G/R) Your television has several setting options that allow you to control the picture quality. ▲ Backlight 5 ● Backlight: Adjusts the brightness of LED back light. ▼ ● Contrast: Adjusts the contrast level of the picture. U Move L Adjust E Enter R Return ● Brightness: Adjusts the brightness level of the picture ● Sharpness: Adjusts the edge definition of the picture. ● Color: Adjusts color saturation of the picture. ● Tint (G/R): Adjusts the color tint of the picture. N When you make changes to Backlight, Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Color or Tint (G/R), the OSD will be adjusted accordingly. N In PC mode, you can only make changes to Backlight, Contrast and Brightness. N Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV. N The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the brightness level of the picture is lowered, which will reduce the overall running cost. ❑ Advanced Settings Samsung’s new TVs allow you to make even more precise picture settings than previous models. N Advanced Settings is available in Standard or Movie mode. N In PC mode, you can only make changes to Dynamic Contrast, Gamma and White Balance from among the Advanced Settings items. ■ Black Tone → Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest You can select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth. Advanced Settings Black Tone : Off Dynamic Contrast : Medium Gamma :0 Color Space : Native ▶ White Balance Flesh Tone :0 Edge Enhancement : On ▼ U Move E Enter R Return English - 17 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 17 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:22 ■ Dynamic Contrast → Off / Low / Medium / High You can adjust the screen contrast so that the optimal contrast is provided. ■ Gamma You can adjust the primary color (red, green, blue) intensity. ■ Color Space Color space is a color matrix composed of red, green and blue colors. Select your favorite color space to experience the most natural color. ● Auto: Auto color space automatically adjusts to the most natural color tone based on program sources. ● Native: Native color space offers deep and rich color tone. ● Custom: Adjusts the color range to suit your preference. N Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen. N Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV. For example, if you have a DVD player connected to HDMI 1 and it is currently selected, settings and adjustments will be saved for the DVD player. Color: Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Cyan or Magenta N Color is available when Color Space is set to Custom. N In Color, you can adjust the RGB values for the selected color. N To reset the adjusted RGB value, select Reset. Red: Adjusts the red saturation level of the selected color. Green: Adjusts the green saturation level of the selected color. Blue: Adjusts the blue saturation level of the selected color. Reset: Resets the color space to the default values. ■ White Balance You can adjust the color temperature for more natural picture colors. ● R-Offset: Adjusts the red color darkness. ● G-Offset: Adjusts the green color darkness. ● B-Offset: Adjusts the blue color darkness. ● R-Gain: Adjusts the red color brightness. ● G-Gain: Adjusts the green color brightness. ● B-Gain: Adjusts the blue color brightness. ● Reset: The previously adjusted white balance will be reset to the factory defaults. ■ Flesh Tone You can emphasize the pink ‘flesh tone’ in the picture. N Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen. ■ Edge Enhancement → Off / On You can emphasize object boundaries in the picture. ■ xvYCC → Off / On Setting the xvYCC mode to on increases detail and color space when watching movies from an external device (ie. DVD player) connected to the HDMI or Component IN jacks. N xvYCC is available when the picture mode is set to Movie, and the external input is set to HDMI or Component mode. N This function may not be supported depending on your external device. ■ LED Motion plus → Off / On Removes drag from fast scenes with a lot of movement to provide a clearer picture. English - 18 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 18 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:22 ❑ Picture Options N In PC mode, you can only make changes to the Color Tone, Size and Smart LED from among the items in Picture Options. ■ ■ Color Tone → Cool / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2 / Warm3 N Warm1, Warm2 or Warm3 is only activated when the picture mode is Movie. N Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV. Picture Options Color Tone : Normal Size : 16:9 Digital NR : Auto HDMI Black Level : Normal Film Mode : Off Blue Only Mode : Off Auto Motion Pro 240Hz ▶ : Standard ▼ U Move E Enter R Return Size Occasionally, you may want to change the size of the image on your screen. Your TV comes with several screen size options, each designed to work best with specific types of video input. Your cable box/satellite receiver may have its own set of screen sizes as well. In general, though, you should view the TV in 16:9 mode as much as possible. O Alternately, you can press the P.SIZE button on the remote control repeatedly to change the picture size. ● 16:9 : Sets the picture to 16:9 wide mode. ● Zoom1: Magnifies the size of the picture on the screen. ● Zoom2: Magnifies the size of the picture more than Zoom1. ● Wide Fit: Enlarges the aspect ratio of the picture to fit the entire screen. ● 4:3 : Sets the picture to 4:3 normal mode. ● Screen Fit: Use the function to see the full image without any cutoff when HDMI (720p/1080i/1080p), Component (1080i/1080p) or DTV (1080i) signals are input. 16:9 16:9 Wide Fit U Move Wide Fit Zoom1 U Move Zoom2 U Move Zoom1 Zoom2 4:3 Screen Fit 4:3 Screen Fit N When Double (Œ, À) mode has been set in PIP mode (see page 21), the Picture Size cannot be set. N Temporary image retention may occur when viewing a static image on the set for more than two hours. N After selecting Zoom1, Zoom2 or Wide Fit: Press the ► button to Select Position, then press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move the picture up and down. Then press the ENTERE button. Press the ► button to Select Size, then press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to magnify or reduce the picture size in the vertical direction. Then press the ENTERE button. N After selecting Screen Fit in HDMI (1080i/1080p) or Component (1080i/1080p) mode, you made need to center the picture: Press the ◄ or ► button to select Position, then press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button to move the picture. Reset: Press the ◄ or ► button to select Reset, then press the ENTERE button. You can initialize the setting. N HD (High Definition): 16:9 - 1080i/1080p (1920x1080), 720p (1280x720) N Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV. Input Source ATV, AV, Component (480i, 480p) DTV(1080i), Component (1080i, 1080p), HDMI (720p, 1080i, 1080p) PC Picture Size 16:9, Zoom1, Zoom2, 4:3 16:9, 4:3, Wide Fit, Screen Fit 16:9, 4:3 English - 19 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 19 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:23 ■ Digital NR → Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto If the broadcast signal received by your TV is weak, you can activate the Digital Noise Reduction feature to help reduce any static and ghosting that may appear on the screen. N When the signal is weak, select one of the other options until the best picture is displayed. ■ HDMI Black Level → Normal / Low You can select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth. N This function is active only when an external device is connected to the TV via HDMI. The HDMI Black Level function may not be compatible with all external devices. ■ Film Mode → Off / Auto1 / Auto2 The TV can be set to automatically sense and process film signals from all sources and adjust the picture for optimum quality. N Film Mode is supported in TV, Video, Component (480i / 1080i) and HDMI (480i / 1080i). ● Off: Turns the Film Mode function off. ● Auto1: Automatically adjusts the picture for the best quality when watching a film. ● Auto2: Automatically optimizes the video text on the screen (not including closed captions) when watching a film. ■ Blue Only Mode → Off / On This function is for AV device measurement experts. This function displays the blue signal only by removing the red and green signals from the video signal so as to provide a Blue Filter effect that is used to adjust the color and Tint of video equipment such as DVD players, Home Theaters, etc. Using this function, you can adjust the color and Tint to preferred values appropriate to the signal level of each video device using the Red / Green / Blue / Cyan / Magenta / Yellow color Bar Patterns, without using an additional Blue Filter. N Blue Only Mode is available when the picture mode is set to Movie or Standard. ■ Auto Motion Pro 240Hz → Off / Clear / Standard / Smooth / Custom / Demo Removes drag from fast scenes with a lot of movement to provide a clearer picture. N If you enable Auto Motion Pro 240Hz, noise may appear on the screen. If this occurs, set Auto Motion Pro 240Hz to Off. N When Smart LED is set to Demo, the Demo option for Auto Motion Pro 240Hz will not be available. ● Off: Switches Auto Motion Pro 240Hz off. ● Clear: Sets Auto Motion Pro 240Hz to minimum. ● Standard: Sets Auto Motion Pro 240Hz to medium. ● Smooth: Sets Auto Motion Pro 240Hz to maximum. ● Custom: Adjusts the blur and judder reduction level to suit your preference. Blur Reduction: Adjusts the blur reduction level from video sources. Judder Reduction: Adjusts the judder reduction level from video sources when playing films. Reset: Reset the custom settings. ● Demo: Displays the difference between Auto Motion Pro 240Hz on and off modes. ■ Smart LED → Off / On / Demo Controls LED backlight to maximize picture clarity. N When Auto Motion Pro 240Hz is set to Demo, the Demo option for Smart LED will not be available. ● Off: Switches off the Smart LED mode. ● On: Switches on the Smart LED mode. ● Demo: Displays the difference between Smart LED on and off modes. The screen after applying Smart LED appears on the left. ❑ Picture Reset → Reset Picture Mode / Cancel Resets all picture settings to the default values. N Reset Picture Mode: Current picture values return to default settings. English - 20 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 20 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:23 ¦ Viewing Picture-in-Picture Main picture Component HDMI1/DVI, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4 PC Setup You can use the PIP feature to simultaneously watch the TV tuner and one external video source. This product has one built-in tuner, which does not allow PIP to function in the same mode. Please see ‘PIP Settings’ below for details. T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also configure PIP related settings by selecting Tools → PIP. N If you select the PIP picture sound, refer to the ‘Configuring the Sound Menu’ instructions. (see page 25) N PIP Settings Light Effect Energy Saving : Watching TV : Off PIP ▶ Sub picture TV N While V-Chip or Internet@TV is in operation, the PIP function cannot be used. N If you turn the TV off while watching in PIP mode and turn it on again, the PIP window will disappear. N You may notice that the picture in the PIP window becomes slightly unnatural when you use the main screen to view a game or karaoke. ■ PIP → On / Off You can activate or deactivate the PIP function. ■ Size → Õ / à / À / Œ You can select a size of the PIP-picture. PIP ■ Position → à / – / — / œ You can select a position of the PIP-picture. N In Double (Œ, À) mode, Position cannot be selected. ■ Air/Cable → Air / Cable Select either Air or Cable as the input source for the sub-screen. ■ Channel You can select the channel for the sub-screen. PIP : On Size :Õ Position :à Air/Cable : Air Channel : Air 3 ▶ U Move E Enter R Return English - 21 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 21 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:23 ¦ Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display Setting Up Your PC Software (Based on Windows XP) The Windows display-settings for a typical computer are shown below. The actual screens on your PC will probably be different, depending upon your particular version of Windows and your particular video card. However, even if your actual screens look different, the same basic set-up information will apply in almost all cases. (If not, contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung Dealer.) 1. First, click on ‘Control Panel’ on the Windows start menu. 2. When the control panel window appears, click on ‘Appearance and Themes’ and a display dialog-box will appear. 3. When the control panel window appears, click on ‘Display’ and a display dialogbox will appear. 4. Navigate to the ‘Settings’ tab on the display dialog-box. The correct size setting (resolution) - Optimum: 1920 X 1080 pixels If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display settings dialog box, the correct value is ‘60’ or ‘60 Hz’. Otherwise, just click ‘OK’ and exit the dialog box. Display Modes If the signal from the system equals the standard signal mode, the screen is adjusted automatically. If the signal from the system doesn’t equal the standard signal mode, adjust the mode by referring to your videocard user guide; otherwise there may be no video. For the display modes listed below, the screen image has been optimized during manufacturing. ■ D-Sub and HDMI/DVI Input N When using an HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack. 640 x 350 720 x 400 640 x 480 832 x 624 1152 x 870 720 x 576 1152 x 864 1280 x 720 1280 x 720 1280 x 960 640 x 480 640 x 480 640 x 480 800 x 600 800 x 600 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1152 x 864 1280 x 1024 1280 x 1024 1280 x 800 1280 x 800 1280 x 960 1360 x 768 1440 x 900 1440 x 900 1680 x 1050 1280 x 720 1280 x 1024 Horizontal Frequency (KHz) 31.469 31.469 35.000 49.726 68.681 35.910 53.783 44.772 56.456 75.231 31.469 37.861 37.500 37.879 48.077 46.875 48.363 56.476 60.023 67.500 63.981 79.976 49.702 62.795 60.000 47.712 55.935 70.635 65.290 52.500 74.620 Vertical Frequency (Hz) 70.086 70.087 66.667 74.551 75.062 59.950 59.959 59.855 74.777 74.857 59.940 72.809 75.000 60.317 72.188 75.000 60.004 70.069 75.029 75.000 60.020 75.025 59.810 74.934 60.000 60.015 59.887 74.984 59.954 70.000 70.000 Pixel Clock Frequency (MHz) 25.175 28.322 30.240 57.284 100.000 32.750 81.750 74.500 95.750 130.000 25.175 31.500 31.500 40.000 50.000 49.500 65.000 75.000 78.750 108.000 108.000 135.000 83.500 106.500 108.000 85.500 106.500 136.750 146.250 89.040 128.943 Sync Polarity (H / V) +/-/+ -/-/-/-/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ -/-/-/+/+ +/+ +/+ -/-/+/+ +/+ +/+ +/+ -/+ -/+ +/+ +/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ -/- 1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 +/+ Mode Resolution IBM MAC VESA CVT VESA DMT VESA GTF VESA DMT / DTV CEA English - 22 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 22 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:23 ¦ Setting up the TV with your PC N Preset: Press the SOURCE button to select PC mode. ❑ Auto Adjustment Picture Use the Auto Adjust function to have the TV automatically adjust the video signals it receives. The function also automatically fine-tunes the settings and adjusts the frequency values and positions. T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the Auto Adjustment by selecting Tools → Auto Adjustment. N This function does not work in DVI-Digital mode. Brightness Sharpness : 45 : 50 Auto Adjustment ▶ Screen Advanced Settings Picture Options Picture Reset ❑ Screen ■ ■ ■ Coarse / Fine The purpose of picture quality adjustment is to remove or reduce picture noise. If the noise is not removed by Fine-tuning alone, then adjust the frequency as best as possible (Coarse) and Fine-tune again. After the noise has been reduced, readjust the picture so that it is aligned on the center of screen. PC Position Adjust the PC’s screen positioning if it does not fit the TV screen. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to adjusting the Vertical-Position. Press the ◄ or ► button to adjust the Horizontal-Position. Screen Coarse 50 Fine 0 PC Position Image Reset U Move E Enter R Return Image Reset You can replace all image settings with the factory default values. English - 23 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 23 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:24 SOUND You can configure the sound mode, volume, multi-track sound options, etc. ¦ Configuring the Sound Menu ❑ Mode → Standard / Music / Movie / Clear Voice / Custom Sound T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the sound mode by selecting Tools → Sound Mode. ● Standard: Selects the normal sound mode. ● Music: Emphasizes music over voices. ● Movie: Provides the best sound for movies. ● Clear Voice: Emphasizes voice over other sounds. ● Custom: Recalls your customized sound settings. Mode : Custom Equalizer SRS TruSurround HD Preferred Language Multi-Track Sound Auto Volume Speaker Select Sound Select : Off : English : Mono : Off : TV Speaker : Main ▶ ❑ Equalizer The sound settings can be adjusted to suit your personal preference. ● Mode: Selects the sound mode among the predefined settings. ● Balance L/R: Adjusts the balance between the right and left speaker. ● 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Bandwidth Adjustment): To adjust the level of different bandwidth frequencies. ● Reset: Resets the equalizer settings to the default values. ❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Off / On SRS TruSurround HD is a patented SRS technology that solves the problem of playing 5.1 multichannel content over two speakers. TruSurround delivers a compelling, virtual surround sound experience through any two-speaker playback system, including internal television speakers. It is fully compatible with all multichannel formats. T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the SRS TruSurround HD by selecting Tools → SRS TS HD. ❑ Preferred Language (digital channels only) Digital-TV broadcasts are capable of simultaneous transmission of many audio tracks (for example, simultaneous translations of the program into foreign languages). N You can listen in a language other than the Preferred Language by pressing the MTS button on the remote control. N Preferred Language is available only in Digital TV mode. N You can only select the language from among the actual languages being broadcast. ❑ Multi-Track Sound (MTS) (analog channels only) O ● ● ● N N Press the MTS button on the remote control repeatedly to select Mono, Stereo or SAP. Mono: Choose for channels that are broadcasting in mono or if you are having difficulty receiving a stereo signal. Stereo: Choose for channels that are broadcasting in stereo. SAP: Choose to listen to the Separate Audio Program, which is usually a foreign-language translation. Multi-Track Sound is available only in Analog TV mode. Depending on the particular program being broadcast, you can listen to Mono, Stereo or SAP. English - 24 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 24 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:24 ❑ Auto Volume → Off / On Each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, and so it is not easy to adjust the volume every time the channel is changed. This feature lets you automatically adjust the volume of the desired channel by lowering the sound output when the modulation signal is high or by raising the sound output when the modulation signal is low. ❑ Speaker Select When you watch TV with it connecting to a Home theater, turn the TV speakers off so you can listen to sound from the Home theater’s (external) speakers. ● External Speaker: Used to listen to the sound of the External (Home Theater) Speakers. ● TV Speaker: Used to listen to the sound of the TV Speakers. N The volume and MUTE buttons do not operate when the Speaker Select is set to External Speaker. Please set the volume on your Home theater. N If you select External Speaker in the Speaker Select menu, the sound settings will be limited TV Speaker External Speaker Video No Signal TV’s Internal Speakers RF / AV / Component / PC / HDMI Sound Output Mute Mute Audio Out (Optical, L/R Out) to Sound System RF / AV / Component / PC / HDMI Sound Output Sound Output Mute ❑ Sound Select → Main / Sub When the PIP feature is activated, you can listen to the sound of the sub (PIP) picture. N You can select this option when PIP is set to On. T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the sound of the sub picture by selecting Tools → PIP → Sound Select. ❑ Sound Reset → Reset All / Reset Sound Mode / Cancel You can restore the Sound settings to the factory defaults. N Reset Sound Mode: Current sound values return to default settings. Sound Reset Select the sound reset options. Reset All Reset Sound Mode Cancel L Move E Enter R Return English - 25 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 25 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:24 SETUP You can set up additional functions. ¦ Configuring the Setup Menu ❑ Language Plug & Play Setup You can set the menu language. ❑ Time For detailed procedures on setting up options, refer to the ‘Setting the Time’ instructions. (see pages 29~30) ❑ Game Mode → Off / On Language Time Game Mode BD Wise Network Type Network Setup V-Chip Caption : English ▶ : Off : On : Cable When connecting to a game console such as PlayStation™ or Xbox™, you can enjoy a more realistic gaming experience by selecting game menu. N Restrictions on game mode (Caution) To disconnect the game console and connect another external device, set Game Mode to Off in the setup menu. If you display the TV menu in Game Mode, the screen shakes slightly. N Game Mode is not available in regular TV and PC mode. N While PIP is in operation, the Game Mode function cannot be used. N If the picture is poor when external device is connected to TV, check if Game Mode is On. Set Game Mode to Off and connect external devices. N If Game Mode is On: Picture mode is automatically changed to Standard and cannot be changed. Sound mode is automatically changed to Custom and cannot be changed. Adjust the sound using the equalizer. The Reset Sound function is activated. Selecting the Reset function after setting the equalizer resets the equalizer settings to the factory defaults. ❑ BD Wise → Off / On Provides the optimal picture quality for SAMSUNG DVD, Blu-ray and Home Theater products which support BD Wise. You can enjoy a richer picture when using them connected to this Samsung TV. N Connect SAMSUNG products that have BD Wise using an HDMI cable. N When the BD Wise set to On, the picture mode is automatically changed to the optimal resolution. N BD Wise is available in HDMI mode. ❑ Network Type / Network Setup For detailed procedures on setting up options, refer to the ‘Setting the Network’ instructions. (see pages 34~36) ❑ V-Chip The V-Chip feature automatically locks out programs that are deemed inappropriate for children. The user must enter a PIN (personal ID number) before any of the V-Chip restrictions are set up or changed. N V-Chip function is not available in HDMI, Component or PC mode. N The default PIN number of a new TV set is 0-0-0-0. N Allow all: Press to unlock all TV ratings. / Block all: Press to lock all TV ratings. ■ Change PIN The Change PIN screen will appear. Choose any 4 digits for your PIN and enter them. As soon as the 4 digits are entered, the Confirm New PIN screen appears. Re-enter the same 4 digits. When the Confirm screen disappears, your PIN has been memorized. N If you forget the PIN, press the remote-control buttons in the following sequence, which resets the pin to 0-0-0-0 : POWER (Off) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (On). English - 26 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 26 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:24 ■ V-Chip Lock → Off / On You can block rated TV Programs. ■ TV Parental Guidelines You can block TV programs depending on their rating. This function allows you to control what TV Parental Guidelines your children are watching. ALL FV V S L D Allow All ● TV-Y: Young children / TV-Y7: Children 7 and over / TV-G: General audience / TV-PG: TV-Y Block All TV-Y7 Parental guidance / TV-14: Viewers 14 and over / TV-MA: Mature audience TV-G ● ALL: Lock all TV ratings. / FV: Fantasy violence / V: Violence / S: Sexual situation / L: TV-PG Adult Language / D: Sexually Suggestive Dialog TV-14 N The V-Chip will automatically block certain categories that are more restrictive. For TV-MA example, if you block TV-Y category, then TV-Y7 will automatically be blocked. Similarly, n Move E Enter R Return if you block the TV-G category, then all the categories in the young adult group will be blocked (TV-G, TV-PG, TV-14 and TV-MA). The sub-ratings (D, L, S, V) work together similarly. N The V-chip will automatically block certain categories that are ‘More restrictive’. For example, if you block L sub-rating in TVPG, then the L sub-ratings in TV-14 and TV-MA will automatically be blocked. ■ MPAA Rating You can block movies depending on their MPAA rating. The Motion Picture Association of MPAA Rating America(MPAA) has implemented a rating system that provides parents or guardians with G advance information on which films are appropriate for children. PG Allow All ● G: General audience (no restrictions). PG-13 Block All R ● PG: Parental guidance suggested. NC-17 ● PG-13: Parents strongly cautioned. X ● R: Restricted. Children under 17 should be accompanied by an adult. NR ● NC-17: No children under age 17. n Move E Enter R Return ● X: Adults only. ● NR: Not rated. N The V-Chip will automatically block any category that is ‘More restrictive’. For example, if you block the PG-13 category, then R, NC-17 and X will automatically be blocked also. ■ Canadian English ● C: Programming intended for children under age 8. ● C8+: Programming generally considered acceptable for children 8 years and over to watch on their own. ● G: General programming, suitable for all audiences. ● PG: Parental Guidance. ● 14+: Programming contains themes or content which may not be suitable for viewers under the age of 14. ● 18+: Adult programming. N The V-Chip will automatically block any category that is ‘More restrictive’. For example, if you block G category, then PG, 14+ and 18+ will automatically be blocked also. ■ Canadian French ● G: General ● 8 ans+: Programming generally considered acceptable for children 8 years and over to watch on their own. ● 13 ans+: Programming may not be suitable for children under the age of 13. ● 16 ans+: Programming is not suitable for children under the age of 16. ● 18 ans+: Programming restricted to adults. N The V-Chip will automatically block any category that is ‘More restrictive’. For example, if you block 8 ans+ category, then 13 ans+, 16 ans+ and 18 ans+ will automatically be blocked also. English - 27 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 27 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:24 ■ The number of all rating information Downloadable U.S. Rating The number of current rating information Parental restriction information can be used while watching DTV channels Rating title N If information is not downloaded from the broadcasting station, the Downloadable U.S. Downloadable U.S. Rating rating menu is deactivated. Humor Level ► 1/2 N Parental restriction information is automatically downloaded while watching DTV Allow All DH channels. It may take several seconds. Block All MH N The Downloadable U.S. rating menu is available for use after information is H VH downloaded from the broadcasting station. However, depending on the information from EH the broadcasting station, it may not be available for use. N Parental restriction levels differ depending on the broadcasting station. The default n Move E Enter R Return menu name and Downloadable US rating changes depending on the downloaded information. N Even if you set the On-screen display to your desired language, the Downloadable U.S. Rating menu will appear in English only. N The rating will automatically block certain categories that are more restrictive. N The rating titles (For example: Humor Level..etc) and TV ratings (For example: DH, MH, H..etc) may differ depending on the broadcasting station. How to Reset the TV after the V-Chip Blocks a Channel (Emergency Escape) If the TV is tuned to a restricted channel, the V-Chip will block it. The screen will go blank and the following message will appear: 1. Enter your PIN, then press the ▲ or ▼ button to temporarily disable the V-Chip Lock. N If you forget the PIN, press the remote-control buttons in the following sequence, which resets the pin to 0-0-0-0 : POWER (Off) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (On) Received Rating : MPAA X/Canadian English : C8+/LL/VH This channel is blocked by V-Chip. Please enter the PIN to unblock. Change Enter PIN ❑ Caption (On-Screen Text Messages) ■ Caption → Off / On You can switch the caption function on or off. If captions are not available, they will not be displayed on the screen. O Press the CC button on the remote control to turn the Caption on or off. N The Caption feature doesn’t work in Component, HDMI or PC modes. ■ Caption Mode You can select the desired caption mode. N The availability of captions depends on the program being broadcast. ● Default / CC1~CC4 / Text1~Text4 (analog channels only) The Analog Caption function operates in either analog TV channel mode or when a signal is supplied from an external device to the TV. (Depending on the broadcasting signal, the Analog Caption function may operate on digital channels.) ● Default / Service1~Service6 / CC1~CC4 / Text1~Text4 (digital channels only) The Digital Captions function operates on digital channels. N Service1~6 in digital caption mode may not be available depending on the broadcast. ■ Digital Caption Options (digital channels only) ● Size: This option consists of Default, Small, Standard and Large. The default is Standard. ● Font Style: This option consists of Default, Style 0 ~ Style 7. You can change the font you want. The default is Style 0. ● Foreground Color: This option consists of Default, White, Black, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta and Cyan. You can change the color of the letter. The default is White. ● Background Color: This option consists of Default, White, Black, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta and Cyan. You can change the background color of the caption. The default is Black. ● Foreground Opacity: This option consists of Default, Transparent, Translucent, Solid and Flashing. You can change the opacity of the letter. English - 28 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 28 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:25 ● ● N N N N Background Opacity: This option consists of Default, Transparent, Translucent, Solid and Flashing. You can change the background opacity of the caption. Return to Default: This option sets Size, Font Style, Foreground Color, Background Color, Foreground Opacity and Background Opacity to their defaults. Digital Caption Options are available only when Default and Service1 ~ Service6 can be selected in Caption Mode. The availability of captions depends on the program being broadcast. Foreground and Background cannot be set to have the same color. Foreground Opacity and Background Opacity cannot be both set to Transparent. ❑ Melody → Off / Low / Medium / High A melody sound can be set to come on when the TV is powered On or Off. N The Melody does not play. When no sound is output from the TV because the MUTE button has been pressed. When no sound is output from the TV because the volume has been reduced to minimum with the VOL – button. When the TV is turned off by Sleep Timer function. ❑ Light Effect → Off / In Standby / Watching TV / Always You can turn the LED on/off on the front of TV. Turn it off to save power or if the LED bothers you. ● Off: LED is always Off. ● In Standby: LED is On when TV is turned off. ● Watching TV: LED is On when watching TV. ● Always: LED is always On, regardless of TV settings. N Set the Light Effect to Off to reduce the power consumption. N The color of light may vary depending on the model. LED ❑ Energy Saving → Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto This feature adjusts the brightness of the TV in order to reduce power consumption. When watching TV at night, set the Energy Saving mode option to High to reduce eye fatigue as well as power consumption. ❑ PIP For detailed procedures on setting up options, refer to the ‘Viewing Picture-in-Picture’ instructions. (see page 21) ¦ Setting the Time ❑ Clock ■ ■ Clock Mode You can set up the current time manually or automatically. ● Auto: Set the current time automatically using the time from the digital broadcast. ● Manual: Set the current time to a manually specified time. N Depending on the broadcast station and signal, the auto time may not be set correctly. If this occurs, set the time manually. N The Antenna or cable must be connected in order to set the time automatically. Setup Setting the clock is necessary in order to use the various timer features of the TV. O The current time will appear every time you press the INFO button. N If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set the clock again. Plug & Play Language : English Time Game Mode BD Wise Network Type Network Setup V-Chip Caption Melody : Off : On : Cable ▶ : Medium Time Clock : -- : -- Sleep Timer : Off Timer 1 : Inactivated Timer 2 : Inactivated Timer 3 : Inactivated ▶ Clock Set You can set the current time manually. U Move E Enter R Return N This function is only available when Clock Mode is set to Manual. N You can set the month, day, year, hour and minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control. English - 29 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 29 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:25 ■ Time Zone Select your time zone. N This function is only available when Clock Mode is set to Auto. ■ DST (Daylight Saving Time) → Off / On / Auto Switches the Daylight Saving Time function on or off. N This function is only available when Clock Mode is set to Auto. ❑ Sleep Timer The sleep timer automatically shuts off the TV after a preset time (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 minutes). T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also set the sleep timer by selecting Tools → Sleep Timer. N To cancel the Sleep Timer function, select Off. Timer 1 On Time 00 00 Volume 10 Repeat ❑ Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3 00 am Inactivate Off Time 00 Source TV am Inactivate Antenna Channel Air 0 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Once Three different on / off timer settings can be made. You must set the clock first. L Move U Adjust E Enter R Return ■ On Time Set the hour, minute, am/pm, and activate / inactivate. (To activate the timer with the setting you’ve chosen, set to Activate.) ■ Off Time Set the hour, minute, am/pm, and activate / inactivate. (To activate the timer with the setting you’ve chosen, set to Activate.) ■ Volume Set the desired volume level. ■ Source → TV / USB / TV Memory You can select the TV, TV Memory or USB device content to be played when the TV turns on automatically. Select TV, TV Memory or USB. (Make sure that an USB device is connected to your TV.) N When there is only one photo file in the USB or the TV Memory, the Slide Show will not play. ■ Antenna (when Source is set to TV) Select Air or Cable. ■ Channel (when Source is set to TV) Select the desired channel. ■ Contents (when Source is set to USB or TV Memory) You can select a folder on the USB Device/TV Memory with music or photo files to be played when the TV turns on automatically. N If the folder name is too long, the folder can not be selected. N If you are using two of the same type USB device, be sure the folder names are different so the correct USB is read. ■ Repeat Select Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual. N When Manual is selected, press the ► button to select the desired day of the week. Press the ENTERE button over the desired day and the c mark will appear. N You can set the hour, minute and channel by pressing the number buttons on the remote control. N Auto Power Off When you set the timer on, the television will eventually turn off, if no controls are operated for 3 hours after the TV was turned on by the timer. This function is only available in timer on mode and prevents overheating, which may occur if a TV is on for too long time. English - 30 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 30 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:25 ¦ Network Connection You can set up the Internet Protocol so that you can communicate with various connected networks. ❑ Network Connection - Cable ■ LAN Connection for a DHCP Environment The procedures to set up the network using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) are described below. Since an IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS are automatically allocated when DHCP is selected, you do not have to enter them manually. 1. Connect the LAN port on the rear panel of the TV and the external modem with a LAN Cable. 2. Connect the Modem port on the wall and the external modem with a Modem Cable. The Modem Port on the Wall External Modem (ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV) 2 Modem Cable TV Rear Panel 1 LAN Cable You can connect the LAN via a Sharer (Router). The Modem Port on the Wall External Modem (ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV) Modem Cable TV Rear Panel IP Sharer LAN Cable LAN Cable You can connect the LAN port and the TV directly depending on your network status. TV Rear Panel The LAN Port on the Wall LAN Cable N The terminals (the position of the port and the type) of the external device may differ depending on the manufacturer. N If the IP address allocation by the DHCP server has failed, turn the external modem off, turn it on again after at least 10 seconds and then try again. N For the connections between the external modem and the Sharer (Router), refer to the owner’s manual of the corresponding product. N You can connect the TV to the LAN directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router) N You cannot use a manual-connection-type ADSL modem because it does not support DHCP. You have to use an automaticconnection-type ADSL modem. English - 31 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 31 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:26 ■ LAN Connection for Static IP Environment The procedures to set up the network using a static IP address are described below. You have to manually enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS that are provided by your Internet Service Provider (ISP). 1. Connect the LAN port on the rear panel of the TV and the LAN port on the wall using the LAN cable. The LAN Port on the Wall TV Rear Panel 1 LAN Cable You can connect the LAN via a Sharer (Router). The LAN Port on the Wall TV Rear Panel IP Sharer LAN Cable LAN Cable N The terminals (the position of the port and the type) of the external device may differ depending on the manufacturer. N If you are using a static IP address, your ISP will inform you of the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS. You must enter these values to complete the network settings. If you do not know the values, ask your network administrator. N For the information on how to configure and connect a Sharer (Router), refer to the owner’s manual for the corresponding product. N You can connect the TV to the LAN directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router). N If you use an IP Sharer (IP Router) that supports DHCP, you can set up the device as either DHCP or static IP. N For the procedures to use a static IP address, ask your Internet Service Provider. English - 32 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 32 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:26 ❑ Network Connection - Wireless You can connect to the network wirelessly through a wireless IP sharer. TV Rear Panel or Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter Wireless IP sharer The LAN Port on the Wall LAN Cable 1. Connect the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ into the USB 1 (HDD) or USB 2 terminal of the TV. N You must use the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’(WIS09ABGN) to use a wireless network. N Samsung’s Wireless LAN adapter is sold separately. The WIS09ABGN Wireless LAN adapter is offered by select retailers, Ecommerce sites and Samsungparts.com. N To use a wireless network, your TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer. If the wireless IP sharer supports DHCP, your TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network. N Samsung’s Wireless LAN adapter supports IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G, IEEE 802.11N. When you play DLNA video over IEEE 802.11B/G connection, the video may not be played smoothly. N If the wireless IP sharer allows you to turn the Ping connection function on/off, turn it on. N Select a channel for the wireless IP sharer that is not currently being used. If the channel set for the wireless IP sharer is currently being used by another device nearby, this will result in interference and communications may fail. N If you apply a security system other than the systems listed below, it will not work with the TV. When applying the security key for the AP (wireless IP sharer), only the following is supported. 1) Authentication Mode : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK 2) Encryption Type : WEP, TKIP, AES When applying the security key for the Ad-hoc mode, only the following is supported. 1) Authentication Mode : SHARED, WPANONE 2) Encryption Type : WEP, TKIP, AES N If your AP supports WPS(Wi-Fi Protected Setup), you can connect to the network via PBC (Push Button Configuration) or PIN (Personal Indentification Number). WPS will automatically configure the SSID and WPA key in either mode. N If the device isn’t certified, it may not connect to the TV via the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’. English - 33 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 33 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:27 ¦ Setting the Network ❑ Network Type ■ Cable Connect to the network using a cable. ■ Wireless Connect to the network wirelessly. Setup Select Cable or Wireless as the method to connect to the network. N The menu is activated only if the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ is connected. Game Mode BD Wise : Off : On Network Type : Cable Network Setup V-Chip Caption Melody Light Effect Energy Saving PIP ▶ : Medium : Watching TV : Off ❑ Network Setup ■ Cable Network Setup (when Network Type is set to Cable) N Please check if the LAN cable is connected. ● Internet Protocol Setup → Auto Setup / Manual Setup ● Network Test: You can test or confirm the network connection status after setting up the network. N When unable to connect to a wired network If your Internet service provider has registered the MAC address of the device used to connect to the Internet for the first time and authenticates the MAC address each time you connect to the Internet, your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet as the MAC address differs from that of the device (PC). In this case, ask your Internet service provider about the procedures to connect devices other than your PC (such as your TV) to the Internet. If your Internet service provider requires an ID or password to connect to the Internet (network), your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet. In this case, you have to enter your ID or password when connecting to the Internet using an Internet Sharer (Router). The internet connection may fail due to a firewall problem. In this case, contact your Internet service provider. If you cannot connect to the Internet even if you have followed the procedures of your Internet service provider, please contact Samsung Electronics at 1-800-SAMSUNG. Cable Network Setup-Auto Setup If you connect the LAN cable and it supports DHCP, the Internet Protocol (IP) Settings are automatically configured. 1. Set Network Type to Cable. 2. Select Cable Network Setup. 3. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Auto Setup. N The Internet Protocol is set automatically. Cable Network Setup Internet Protocol Setup : Auto Setup ▶ Network Test IP Address : Subnet Mask : Gateway DNS Server : : U Move E Enter R Return 4. Select Network Test to check the network connectivity. Cable Network Setup-Manual To connect the TV to the LAN using a static IP address, you must set up the Internet Protocol (IP). 1. Set Network Type to Cable. 2. Select Cable Network Setup. 3. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Manual Setup. Cable Network Setup Internet Protocol Setup : Manual Setup ▶ Network Test IP Address : 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask : 0 0 0 0 Gateway DNS Server : : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4. Set up IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway and DNS Server. N Press the number buttons on the remote control when you set the Network manually. U Move E Enter R Return 5. Select Network Test to check the network connectivity. ■ Wireless Network Setup N The menu is activated only if the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ is connected. ● Internet Protocol Setup → Auto Setup / Manual Setup ● Network Test: You can test or confirm the network connection status after setting up the network. English - 34 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 34 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:27 N When unable to connect to an AP Your TV may fail to locate an AP that is configured as a private SSID type. In this case, please change the AP settings and try again. If your Internet service provider has registered the MAC address of the device used to connect to the Internet for the first time and authenticates the MAC address each time you connect to the Internet, your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet as the MAC address differs from that of the device (PC). In this case, ask your Internet service provider about the procedures to connect devices other than your PC (such as your TV) to the Internet. If you cannot connect to the Internet even if you have followed the procedures of your Internet service provider, please contact a Samsung Electronics at 1-800-SAMSUNG. ● Select a network Access Point: You can select the IP sharer to use when using a wireless network. N If a wireless Access Point is not in the Access Point list, press the Red button. Wireless Network Setup N When the connection is made, you will be returned to the screen automatically. Security Key N If you have selected an Access Point with a security authentication: Number A B C D E F The Security Key input screen appears. Enter the security key and press the Delete Done Blue button on the remote control. N If security encryption type is WEP, 0~9, A~F will be available when you input n Move `~9 Number E Enter R Return security key. Connecting WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) ● If Security Key is already set: In access point list, select WPS. N You can select PBC, PIN, Security Key. Wireless Network Setup Select a network Search Ad-hoc 3/9 sson jee AP_1 Ap_2 PBC PIN Security Key U Move E Enter R Return Connecting by using PBC: Select a PBC (Push Button Configuration). Press the PBC button on the AP (access point) within 2 minutes, and wait for connection. Press the PBC button on the access point. Access Point Name : AP_1 Cancel Press OK After input TV’s Pincode in the access Connecting by using PIN: Select a PIN (Personal Identification Number). point’s setup. Access Point Name : AP_1 PIN Code : 12345678 N The message showing the PIN Code is displayed. Input the PIN Code at AP OK Cancel device within 2 minutes. Select OK and wait for connection. N Try again if connecting operation doesn’t work N When the connection is not established although tried again, reset the access point. Please refer to the manual of each access point. Connecting by using Security Key: When selecting Security Key, the input window is displayed. Input the security key and press Blue button. N Try again if connecting operation doesn’t work. Wireless Network Setup Security Key E F H I J K L M N O A B P Q C D R S T G U V W X Y Z Number Lowercase Delete Done n Move `~9 Number E Enter R Return ● If Security Key is not set: When the security setting of AP that supports WPS is NONE, you can select PBC, PIN, None Security. None Security is capable of connecting to AP directly without using WPS function. N Process of PBC, PIN is same as above. Refer to if Security Key is already set. N Try again if connecting operation doesn’t work. Wireless Network Setup Select a network Search Ad-hoc 3/9 sson jee AP_1 Ap_2 PBC PIN None Security U Move E Enter R Return English - 35 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 35 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:28 Ad-hoc: You can connect to a mobile device without an access point through the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ by using a peer to peer network. How to connect to new Ad-hoc 1. Choose Select a network, then a device list is displayed. 2. While in the device list, press the Blue button on the remote or select Ad-hoc. N The message The existing network system may have limited functionality. Do you want to change the network connection? is displayed. The existing network system may have limited functionality. Do you want to change the network connection? Yes 3. Input the generated Network Name(SSID) and Security Key into the device you want to connect. No How to connect an existing Ad-hoc device 1. Choose Select a network, the device list is displayed. 2. Select the device you want in the Device list. 3. If security key was applied, input the security key again. N If network doesn’t operate normally, please check the Network Name(SSID) and Security Key again. If the Security Key is incorrect, it may be the reason for the malfunction. Wireless Network Setup-Auto Setup If you want to connect AP, AP should support DHCP. Only devices which support Ad-hoc mode can be connected without DHCP. 1. Set Network Type to Wireless. Wireless Network Setup Internet Protocol Setup : Auto Setup ▶ Network Test 2. Select Wireless Network Setup. 3. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Auto Setup. N The Internet Protocol is set automatically. Select a network : AP1 IP Address : Subnet Mask : Gateway DNS Server : : 4. Select a network through Select a network. U Move E Enter R Return 5. Select Network Test to check the network connectivity. Wireless Network Setup-Manual Setup Wireless Network Setup 1. Set Network Type to Wireless. Internet Protocol Setup 2. Select Wireless Network Setup. : Manual Setup ▶ Network Test Select a network : AP1 3. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Manual Setup. IP Address : 0 0 0 0 4. Set up IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway and DNS Server. N Press the number buttons on the remote control when you set the Network manually. Subnet Mask : 0 0 0 0 Gateway DNS Server : : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U Move E Enter R Return 5. Select a network through Select a network. 6. Select Network Test to check the network connectivity. English - 36 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 36 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:29 INPUT / SUPPORT ¦ Input Menu ❑ Source List ■ TV / AV / Component / PC / HDMI1/DVI / HDMI2 / HDMI / HDMI4 / USB N You can choose only those external devices that are connected to the TV. In the Source List, connected inputs will be highlighted and sorted to the top. Inputs that are not connected will be sorted to the bottom. N If USB devices are connected to the USB 1 (HDD) and USB 2 jacks, they are displayed as USB 1 and USB 2 in order. N PC always stay activated. N Using the color buttons on the remote with the Source list Red (Refresh): Refreshes the connected external devices. Press this if your Source is on and connected, but does not appear in the list. TOOLS (Tools): Displays the Edit Name and Information menus. Input Use to select TV or other external input sources such as DVD / Blu-ray players / Cable Box / Satellite receivers (Set-Top Box) connected to the TV. Use to select the input source of your choice. O Press the SOURCE button on the remote control to view an external signal source. SourceList EditName SourceList TV PC :---- AV Component HDMI1/DVI HDMI2 :---:---:---:---- RefreshTTools ❑ Edit Name ■ VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA Name the device connected to the input jacks to make your input source selection easier. N When a PC with a resolution of 1920 x 1080 @ 60Hz is connected to the HDMI IN 1(DVI) port, you should set the HDMI1/DVI mode to DVI PC in the Edit Name of the Input mode. N When connecting an HDMI/DVI cable to the HDMI IN 1(DVI) port, you should set the HDMI1/DVI mode to DVI or DVI PC in the Edit Name of the Input mode. In this case, a separate sound connection is required. ¦ Support Menu ❑ Legal Notice ❑ Product Guide The Product Guide gives you information on the most important features of this TV. The descriptions provided by this function are in English only. Support View the Legal Notice and General Disclaimer regarding Third Party Contents and Service. N The General Disclaimer may differ depending on the country. LegalNotice ▶ ProductGuide SelfDiagnosis SoftwareUpgrade HDConnectionGuide ContactSamsung English - 7 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 37 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:29 Using the Remote Control Buttons in the Product Guide Menu Button Yellow Button Wheel (◄/►) ENTERE RETURN EXIT Operations Shows the contents of the Product Guide sequentially. (Auto Play) Move the cursor and select an item. Select the currently selected item. Return to the previous menu. Stop the current function and return to the Product Guide main menu. ❑ Self Diagnosis ■ Picture Test If you think you have a picture problem, perform the picture test. Check the color pattern on the screen to see if the problem still exists. ● Yes: If the test pattern does not appear or there is noise in the test pattern, select Yes. There may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s call center for assistance. ● No: If the test pattern is properly displayed, select No. There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem still persists, refer to the external device’s user manual. Self Diagnosis Picture Test ▶ Sound Test Signal Strength U Move E Enter R Return ■ Sound Test If you think you have a sound problem, please perform the sound test. You can check the sound by playing a built-in melody sound through the TV. N If you hear no sound from the TV’s speakers, before performing the sound test, make sure Speaker Select is set to TV speaker in the Sound menu. N The melody will be heard during the test even if Speaker Select is set to External Speaker or the sound is muted by pressing the MUTE button. ● Yes: If during the sound test you can hear sound only from one speaker or not at all, select Yes. There may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s call center for assistance. ● No: If you can hear sound from the speakers, select No. There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem still persists, refer to the external device’s user manual. ■ Signal Strength (digital channels only) Unlike analog channels, which can vary in reception quality from ‘snowy’ to clear, digital (HDTV) channels have either perfect reception quality or you will not receive them at all. So, unlike analog channels, you cannot fine tune a digital channel. You can, however, adjust your antenna to improve the reception of available digital channels. N If the signal strength meter indicates that the signal is weak, physically adjust your antenna to increase the signal strength. Continue to adjust the antenna until you find the best position with the strongest signal. English - 38 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 38 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:29 ❑ Software Upgrade Samsung may offer upgrades for the TV’s firmware in the future. These upgrades can be performed via the TV when it is connected to the Internet, or by downloading the new firmware from samsung.com to a USB memory device. N Current Version is the software already installed in the TV. N Alternative Software (Backup) shows the previous version that will be replaced. N Software is represented as ‘Year/Month/Day_Version’. The more recent the date, the newer the software version. Installing the latest version is recommended. ■ By USB Insert a USB drive containing the firmware upgrade downloaded from samsung.com into the TV. Please be careful to not disconnect the power or remove the USB drive while upgrades are being applied. The TV will turn off and turn on automatically after completing the firmware upgrade. Please check the firmware version after the upgrades are complete (the new version will have a higher number than the older version). When software is upgraded, video and audio settings you have made will return to their default (factory) settings. We recommend you write down your settings so that you can easily reset them after the upgrade. TV Rear Panel or USB Drive Software Upgrade Current Version 2009/01/17_000001 By USB ▶ By Online Alternative Software 2009/01/16_000000 U Move E Enter R Return ■ By Online Upgrades the software using the Internet. N First, configure your network. For detailed procedures on using the Network Setup, refer to the ‘Setting the Network’ instructions. (see pages 34~36) N If the internet connection doesn’t operate properly, connection can be broken. please retry downloading. If the problem still happens, download by USB and upgrade. ■ Alternative Software (Backup) If there is an issue with the new firmware and it is affecting operation, you can change the software to the previous version. N If software was changed, existing software is displayed. N You can change current software to alternative software by ‘Alternative Software’. ❑ HD Connection Guide This menu presents the connection method that provides the optimal quality for the HDTV. Refer to this information when connecting external devices to the TV. ❑ Contact Samsung View this information when your TV does not work properly or when you want to upgrade the software. You can view the information regarding the call center, product and software file download method. English - 39 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 39 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:30 Media Play (USB & DLNA) ¦ Connecting a USB Device 1. Press the POWER button to turn the TV on. 2. Connect a USB device containing photo, music and/or movie files to the USB 1 (HDD) or USB 2 jack on the side of the TV. TV Rear Panel 3. When the Application selection screen is displayed, press the ENTERE button or to select Media Play (USB & DLNA). N MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not supported. N The file system supports FAT16, FAT32 and NTFS. USB Drive N Certain types of USB Digital camera and audio devices may not be compatible with this TV. N Media Play only supports USB Mass Storage Class devices (MSC). MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport device. Examples of MSC SUM are Thumb drives, Flash Card Readers and USB HDD (USB HUB is not supported.). PHOTO N Please connect directly to the USB port of your TV. If you are using a separate cable connection, there may be a USB compatibility problem. N Before connecting your device to the TV, please back up your files to prevent them from damage or loss of data. SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data Photo Music Movie Setup file damage or data loss. e Exit Device SUM N Connect a USB HDD to the dedicated USB 1 (HDD) port. Warning: Do not exceed 1.5 amperes. N Do not disconnect the USB device while it is loading. N MSC supports MP3, JPEG and movie files, while a PTP device supports JPEG files only. N The higher the resolution of the image, the longer it takes to display on the screen. N The maximum supported JPEG resolution is 15360X8640 pixels. N For unsupported or corrupted files, the ‘Not Supported File Format’ message is displayed. N If sort key is set to Basic View, up to 1000 files can be displayed in each folder. The other sort key can display up to 10000 files. N MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non-free site cannot be played. Digital Rights Management (DRM) is a technology that supports the creation of content, the distribution and management of the content in an integrated and comprehensive way, including the protection of the rights and interests of the content providers, the prevention of the illegal copying of contents, as well as managing billings and settlements. N When moving to a photo, loading may take a few seconds. At this point, the loading icon will appear at the screen. N If more than 2 PTP devices are connected, you can only use one at a time. N If more than one MSC device is connected, some of them may not be recognized. If a device requires high power (more than 500mA or 5V), the USB device may not be supported. N If an over-power (Fail add new device USB 1/USB 2 Power Overload) warning message is displayed while you are connecting or using a USB device, the device may not be recognized or may malfunction. 851.86MB/993.02MB Free English - 40 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 40 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:30 Using the Remote Control Button in Media Play Menu Button Wheel (▲/▼/◄/►) ENTERE ∂/∑ RETURN TOOLS ∫ π/μ INFO MEDIA.P z, EXIT, TV Operations Move the cursor and select an item. Select the currently selected item. While playing a slide show, movie, or music file: - Pressing the ENTERE button during play pauses the play. - Pressing the ENTERE button during pause resumes the play. Play or pause the Slide Show, music or movie. Return to the previous menu. Run various functions from the Photo, Music and Movie menus. Stop the current slide show, Music or Movie file. Jump to previous group/Jump to next group. Show file information. Exit Media Play mode. Stop Media Play mode and Returns to TV mode. ¦ Media Play Function This function enables you to view and listen to photo, music and/or movie files saved on a USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) device. Entering the Media Play (USB & DLNA) Menu 1. Press the MENU button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Application, then press the ENTERE button. SUM 851.86MB/993.02MB Free PHOTO 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Media Play (USB & DLNA), then press the ENTERE button. N The Media Play (USB & DLNA) menu is displayed. Photo SUM Music Movie Setup R Return Device O Press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control to display the Media Play menu. O Press the SOURCE button on the remote control to view the source list. Then press the ▲ or ▼ button to select USB. RF 3. Press the Red button, then press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the TV memory or USB Memory. Press the ENTERE button. N This function differs depending on the TV Memory / USB Memory Device / DLNA device. N The selected USB device name appears at the bottom left of the screen. 4. Press the ◄ or ► button to select an icon (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup), then press the ENTERE button. RF N To exit Media Play mode, press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control. English - 41 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 41 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:30 Removing a USB Memory Device Safely You can remove the device safely from the TV. 1. Press the TOOLS button in the Media Play file list screen, or while a Slide Show, music or movie is being played. Color Folder Preference 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Safe Remove, then press the ENTERE button. 3. Remove the USB device from the TV. 5/15 1231.jpg SUM 1232.jpg 1233.jpg Device 1234.jpg Basic View Timeline Slide Show Copy Play Current Group Copy Current Group 1236.jpg 1237.jpg 1235.jpg Information Safe Remove Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return Screen Display Color Folder Preference 1 Basic View Sort key List Section Timeline Group List Section 2 c 5/15 File List Section 1231.jpg 1232.jpg 1233.jpg 1235.jpg 1234.jpg 1236.jpg 1237.jpg 3 6 SUM 4 Device 5 1File(s) Selected Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return Move to either ‘Sort key List Section’, ‘Group List Section’ or ‘File List Section’ using the Up and Down buttons. After selecting a section, press the ◄ or ► buttons to select an item. 1 Current Sort key: This field shows the current standard for sorting files. Press the ◄ or ► button to change the standard for sorting files. 2 View Groups: Shows the detailed groups of the files sorted according to the selected Sort key. The sort group where the currently selected file is contained is highlighted. 3 Currently selected file: The selected file is the file you can now control. Photo and movie files are displayed as thumbnail images. 4 Current Device: Shows the currently selected device name. Press the Red button to select a device. Red (Device) button: Selects a connected device. 5 Help Items Green (Favorites Setting) button: Changes the Favorites Setting for the selected file. Press this button repeatedly until the desired value appears. Yellow (Select) button: Selects file from the file list. Selected files are marked with a symbol c. Press the Yellow button again to cancel a file selection. TOOLS (Tools) button: Displays the option menus. (The option menu changes according to the current status.) 6 Item Selection Information: Shows the number of files that are selected by pressing the Yellow button. English - 42 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 42 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:34 ¦ Sorting the Photo List You can sort photos in the Photo List by a particular standard. Color 1. Press the MEDIA.P button. Folder Preference Basic View Timeline 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Photo, then press the ENTERE button. 5/15 3. Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort key List Section. 4. Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard. (Basic View, Timeline, Color, Folder, Preference) N The photos are sorted according to the newly selected sorting standard. 1231.jpg 1232.jpg 1233.jpg 1234.jpg 1235.jpg 1236.jpg 1237.jpg Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return SUM Device 5. Press the ▼ button to move to the File List Section. Press the ∂ (Play)/ ENTERE button to start the Slide Show in the order you selected. N To move to the previous/next group, press the π (REW) or μ (FF) button. N Photo information is automatically set. The Color information extracted from a photo file may be different from your expectations. You can change the Color and preference. N PTP does not support folder sort mode. ❑ Basic View Shows the folders on the USB memory device. If you select a folder and press the ENTERE button, only the photo files contained in the selected folder are displayed. N When sorted according to the Basic View, you cannot set Favorite files. ❑ Timeline Sorts photos by date. It sorts by year and month from the earliest photo. ❑ Color → Red / Yellow / Green / Blue / Magenta / Black / Gray / Unclassified Sorts photos by Color. You can change the photo Color information. N You should set the Use Color View to on in the Setup menu before sorting photos by Color. ❑ Folder Sorts photos by folder. If there are many folders in USB, the photos files are shown in order in each folder. The photo file in the Root folder is shown first and the others are shown in alphabetical order by name. ❑ Preference → FFF / FFF / FFF / FFF Sorts photos by preference (Favorite). You can change the photo preferences. N Changing the Favorites Setting Select the desired photo in the File List Section, then press the Green button repeatedly until the desired setting appears. N Up to 3 stars can be selected. N The stars are for grouping purposes only. For example, the 3 star setting does not have any priority over the one star setting. English - 43 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 43 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:35 ¦ Photo List Option Menu 1. Press the MEDIA.P button. Basic View 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Photo, then press the ENTERE button. 3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo file. N Selecting Multiple Photos Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo file. Then press the Yellow button. Repeat the above operation to select multiple photo files. The mark c appears next to the selected photo file. 4. Press the TOOLS button. N The option menu changes according to the current status. Color Timeline Folder 5/15 1231.jpg SUM 1232.jpg 1233.jpg Device 1234.jpg Preference Slide Show Copy Play Current Group Change Group Info 1236.jpg 1237.jpg 1235.jpg Copy Current Group Information ▼ Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return ❑ Slide Show Using this menu, you can play a SlideShow using the photo files on the USB memory device. ❑ Copy / Copy Current Group / Copy the selected file (When multiple files are selected) Select a photo you want to copy. (Alternatively, select multiple files by pressing the Yellow button.) Press the TOOLS button to select Copy (or Copy Current Group / Copy the selected file). The files on the USB device are saved to the TV memory. N You can only copy the files saved on the USB device. N When the TV memory is full, files cannot be copied. ❑ Delete / Delete All / Delete Selected File (When multiple files are selected) Select a photo to delete. (Alternatively, select multiple files by pressing the Yellow button.) Press the TOOLS button to select Delete (or Delete All / Delete Selected File). The files are deleted. N You can only delete the files saved in the TV memory. N You cannot recover a deleted file. ❑ Play Current Group Using this menu, you can play a SlideShow using only the photo files in the currently selected sorting group. ❑ Change Group Info (When the Sort key is the Color) You can change a selected photo file’s (or group of files) Color information in order to move it from one Color group to another. N This does not change the actual Color of the photo. N The group information of the current file is updated and the photos are moved to the new Color group. N To change the information of multiple files, select the files you want by pressing the Yellow button. ❑ Deselect All (When at least one file is selected) You can deselect all files. N The c mark indicating the corresponding file is selected is hidden. ❑ Information The photo file information including the name, the size, the resolution, the date modified and the path is displayed. N You can view the information of photo files during a SlideShow using the same procedures. O Press the INFO button to viewing the information. ❑ Safe Remove You can remove the USB device safely from the TV. RF English - 44 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 44 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:37 ¦ Viewing a Photo or Slide Show Viewing a Slide Show 1. Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section. Color Folder 2. Press the TOOLS button. 3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Slide Show, then press the ENTERE button. N All files in the File List Section will be used for the Slide Show. N During the slide show, files are displayed in order from the currently shown file. N The Slide Show progresses in the order sorted in the File List Section. N Music files can be automatically played during the Slide Show if the Background Music is set to On. Preference 5/15 1231.jpg 1232.jpg SUM 1233.jpg 1234.jpg Basic View Timeline Slide Show Copy Play Current Group Copy Current Group 1236.jpg 1237.jpg 1235.jpg Information Safe Remove Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return Device ▶ Normal 1234.jpg 580x765 2009/01/02 5/15 E Pause ◀▶ Previous / Next SUM T Tools R Return O While a photo list is displayed, press the ∂(Play)/ENTERE button on the remote control to start the slide show. N SlideShow Control Buttons Button ENTERE ∂ ∑ ∫ π/μ TOOLS RF Operations Play/Pause the Slide Show. Play the Slide Show. Pause the Slide Show. Exit Slide Show and return to the photo list. Change the Slide Show playing speed. Run various functions from the Photo menus. Playing current group 1. Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort Key List Section. Color Folder Preference Basic View Timeline 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard. 3. Press the ▼ button to move to the Group List Section. 5/15 4. Select a group using the ◄ and ► buttons. 5. Press the ∂ (Play) button. A slideshow begins with the files of the selected group. ● 1231.jpg 1232.jpg 1233.jpg Alternatively 1. Select a Sort key and then in the File List Section, select the photos contained in the desired group. N To move to the previous/next group, press the π (REW) or µ (FF) button. SUM Device 1234.jpg 1235.jpg 1236.jpg 1237.jpg Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return 2. Press the TOOLS button. 3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Play Current Group, then press the ENTERE button. N Only the photos in the sorting group including the selected files will be used for the Slide Show. English - 45 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 45 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:40 To perform a Slide Show with only the selected files 1. Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo in the File List Section. 3. Press the Yellow button. 4. Repeat the above operation to select multiple photos. N The c mark appears to the left of the selected photo. N If you select one file, the Slide Show will not be performed. N To deselect all selected files, press the TOOLS button and select Deselect All. 5. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button. N The selected files will be used for the Slide Show. ● Alternatively 1. In the File List Section, press the Yellow button to select the desired photos. 2. Press the TOOLS button. 3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Slide Show, then press the ENTERE button. N The selected files will be used for the Slide Show. ¦ Slide Show Option Menu 1. During a slide show (or when viewing a photo), press the TOOLS button to set the option. 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired option, then press the ENTERE button. Tools Stop Slide Show Slide Show Speed : Normal Slide Show Effect : Fade1 Rotate Zoom Background Music ❑ Stop Slide Show / Start Slide Show Picture Setting Sound Setting You can start or stop a SlideShow. Information ▼ U Move E Enter e Exit ❑ Slide Show Speed → Slow / Normal / Fast You can select the slide show speed. N This function is available only during a slide show. N You can also change the speed of the Slide Show by pressing the π (REW) or μ (FF) button during the Slide Show. ❑ Slide Show Effect You can select the screen transition effect used in the slideshow. ■ None / Fade1 / Fade2 / Blind / Spiral / Checker / Linear / Stairs / Wipe / Random N This function is available only during a slide show. ❑ Rotate You can rotate photos saved on a USB memory device. N Whenever you press the ◄ button, it rotates by 270˚, 180˚, 90˚, and 0˚. N Whenever you press the ► button, it rotates by 90˚, 180˚, 270˚, and 0˚. N The rotated file is not saved. English - 46 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 46 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:41 ❑ Zoom You can magnify photos saved on a USB memory device. (x1 → x2 → x4) N To move the enlarged photo image, press the ENTERE button, then press the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons. Note that when the enlarged picture is smaller than the original screen size, the location change function doesn’t work. N The enlarged file is not saved. ❑ Background Music You can select background music when watching a Slide Show. N To use this feature, there must be music and photo files stored on the USB device. ■ Background Music → Off / On ● Off: Background music is not played. ● On: When the background music is available, if you select On, the music is played back. ■ BGM Mode → Mood / Selected File / Shuffle You can select a mode to use for the background music. ■ BGM Mood → Energetic / Rhythmical / Sad / Exciting / Calm / Unclassified Music with the mood you selected is set as the background music. N If you set BGM Mode to Mood, you can select a mood. ■ Select Music File (1 File(s) Selected) Only the selected music file is set as the background music. N If you set BGM Mode to Selected File, you can select a music file. ❑ Picture Setting / Sound Setting You can select the picture and sound settings. ❑ Information The photo file information is displayed. ❑ Safe Remove You can remove the USB device safely from the TV. English - 47 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 47 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:41 ¦ Sorting the Music List You can sort music files in the Music List by a particular standard. Genre 1. Press the MEDIA.P button. Folder Preference Basic View Title 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Music, then press the ENTERE button. Energetic 3. Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort Key List Section. 4. Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard. (Basic View, Title, Artist, Mood, Genre, Folder, Preference) N The Music files are sorted according to the newly selected sorting standard. Lies 3/37 Glen Hans Once Ost 2007 Soundtrack Want Me Way I Love You HaHaHa Gold Shine Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return SUM Device 5. Press the ▼ button to move to the File List Section. Press the ∂ (Play)/ ENTERE button to start playing music in the order selected by the user. N To move to the previous/next group, press the π (REW) or μ (FF) button. N Music information is automatically set. The mood information extracted from a music file may differ from your expectations. You can change the mood and preference. N If there is no title information for a music file, the filename is displayed. N If no information is available for the Artist, Album, Year, or Genre the corresponding item is displayed as blank. ❑ Basic View Shows the folders of the USB memory device. If you select a folder and press the ENTERE button, only the music files contained in the selected folder are displayed. N When sorted according to the Basic View, you cannot set Favorite files. ❑ Title Sorts the music titles in symbol/number/alphabet/special order, and shows the music file. ❑ Artist Sorts the music file by artist in symbol/number/alphabet/special order. ❑ Mood → Energetic / Rhythmical / Sad / Exciting / Calm / Unclassified Sorts music files by the mood. You can change the music mood information. ❑ Genre Sorts music files by the genre. ❑ Folder Sorts music files by the folder. If there are many folders in USB, the files are shown in order in each folder. The music file in the Root folder is shown first and the others are shown in alphabetical order by name. ❑ Preference → FFF / FFF / FFF / FFF Sorts music files by preference (Favorite). You can change the music files preferences. N Changing the Favorites Setting Select the desired music file in the File List Section, then press the Green button repeatedly until the desired setting appears. N Up to 3 stars can be selected. N The stars are for grouping purposes only. For example, the 3 star setting does not have any priority over the one star setting. English - 48 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 48 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:41 ¦ Music List Option Menu 1. Press the MEDIA.P button. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Music, then press the ENTERE button. 3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired Music file. N Selecting Multiple Music Files Press the◄ or ► button to select the desired music file. Then press the Yellow button. Repeat the above operation to select multiple music files. The mark c appears to the selected music file. 4. Press the TOOLS button. N The option menu changes according to the current status. Genre Folder Preference Energetic Lies SUM Basic View Play Current Group Copy Copy Current Group Information Gold HaHaHa Remove Safe 3/37 Glen Hans Once Ost 2007 Soundtrack Want Me Way Device Title I Love You Shine Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return ❑ Play Current Group Using this menu, you can only play music files in the currently selected sorting group. ❑ Copy / Copy Current Group / Copy the selected file (When multiple files are selected) Select the music to copy. (Alternatively, select multiple files by pressing the Yellow button.) Press the TOOLS button to select Copy (or Copy Current Group / Copy the selected file). The files on the USB device are saved to the TV memory. N You can only copy the files saved on the USB device. N When the TV memory is full, files cannot be copied. ❑ Delete / Delete All / Delete Selected File (When multiple files are selected) Select the file to delete. (Alternatively, select multiple files by pressing the Yellow button.) Press the TOOLS button to select Delete (or Delete All / Delete Selected File). The files are deleted. N You can only delete the files saved in the TV memory. N You cannot recover a deleted file. ❑ Change Group Info (When the Sort key is Mood) You can change the mood information of music files. The group information of the current file is updated and the file is moved to the new group. N To change the information of multiple files, select files by pressing the Yellow button. ❑ Deselect All (When at least one file is selected) You can deselect all files. N The c mark indicating the corresponding file is selected is hidden. ❑ Information The music file information including the name, the size, the date modified and the path is displayed. N You can view the music file information during Play Current Group using the same procedures. O Press the INFO button to viewing the information. ❑ Safe Remove You can remove the USB device safely from the TV. RF English - 49 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 49 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:42 ¦ Playing Music Playing a music file 1. Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section. ▶ 00:00:04 / 00:04:04 3/37 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select a music file to be played. Way I Love You HaHaHa 3. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button. N This menu only shows files with the MP3 file extension. Files with other file extensions are not displayed, even if they are saved on the same USB device. N The selected file is displayed at the top with its playing time. E Pause ◀▶ Previous / Next T Tools R Return SUM N To adjust the music volume, press the volume button on the remote control. To mute the sound, press the MUTE button on the remote control. N If the sound is odd when playing MP3 files, adjust the Equalizer and SRS TruSurround HD in the Sound menu. (An over-modulated MP3 file may cause a sound problem.) N The playing duration of a music file may be displayed as ‘00:00:00’ if its playing time information is not found at the start of the file. N π (REW) or μ (FF) buttons do not function during play. N Music Play Control Buttons Button ENTERE ∂ ∑ ∫ TOOLS Operations Play/Pause the music file. Play the music file Pause the music file Exit play mode and return to the music list. Run various functions from the Music menus. N Music function information icon p When all music files in the folder (or the selected file) are repeated. Repeat Mode is On. q When all music files in the folder (or the selected file) are played once. Repeat Mode is Off. Playing the music group 1. Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort key Section. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard. 3. Press the ▼ or ENTERE button to move to the Group List Section. 4. Press the ∂ (Play) button. The files of the selected group will start playing. ● Alternatively 1. Select a sort key and then in the File List Section, select the files contained in the desired group. N To move to the previous/next group, press the π (REW) or µ (FF) button. 2. Press the TOOLS button. 3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Play Current Group, then press the ENTERE button. N The music files in the sorting group including the selected file are played. Playing the selected music files 1. Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired music file. 3. Press the Yellow button. 4. Repeat the above operation to select multiple music files. N The c appears to the left of the selected music file. N To deselect all selected files, press the TOOLS button and select Deselect All. 5. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button. N The selected files will be played. English - 50 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 50 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:42 ¦ Music Play Option Menu Music Play Option Menu Tools ❑ Repeat Mode → On / Off Repeat Mode ◀ On ▶ Picture Setting You can play music files repeatedly. Sound Setting Information Safe Remove ❑ Picture Setting / Sound Setting You can configure the picture and sound settings. U Move L Adjust e Exit ❑ Information The music file information is displayed. ❑ Safe Remove You can remove the USB device safely from the TV. ¦ Sorting the Movie List You can sort movies in the Movie List by a particular standard. 1. Press the MEDIA.P button. Title Folder Preference Basic View Timeline 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Movie, then press the ENTERE button. 3. Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort key List Section. 4. Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard. (Basic View, Timeline, Title, Folder, Preference) N The movie files are sorted according to the newly selected sorting standard. 5. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button to play the movie in the order selected. N Movie information is automatically set. You can change the preference. 5/15 1231.avi SUM 1232.avi 1233.avi Device ABCD.avi 1235.avi 1236.avi 1237.avi Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return ❑ Basic View Shows the folders of the USB memory device. If you select a folder and press the ENTERE button, only the movie files contained in the selected folder are displayed. N When sorted according to the Basic View, you cannot set Favorite files. ❑ Timeline Sorts movies by date. It sorts by year and month from the earliest movie. ❑ Title Sorts and displays the movie titles in symbol/number/alphabet/special order. ❑ Folder If there are many folders in USB, the movies files are shown in order in each folder. The movie file in the Root folder is shown first and the others are shown in alphabetical order by name. ❑ Preference → FFF / FFF / FFF / FFF Sorts movies by preference. (Favorite) You can change the movie preferences. N Changing the Favorites Setting Select the desired movie file in the File List Section, then press the Green button repeatedly until the desired setting appears. N Up to 3 stars can be selected. N The stars are for grouping purposes only. For example, the 3 star setting does not have any priority over the one star setting. English - 51 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 51 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:43 ¦ Movie List Option Menu 1. Press the MEDIA.P button. Title 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Movie, then press the ENTERE button. 3. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired Movie file. N Selecting Multiple Movie Files Press the◄ or ► button to select the desired movie file. Then press the Yellow button. Repeat the above operation to select multiple movie files. The mark c appears to the selected movie file. 4. Press the TOOLS button. N The option menu changes according to the current status. Folder Preference 5/15 1231.avi 1232.avi SUM 1233.avi Device ABCD.avi Basic View Timeline Play Current Group Copy Copy Current Group Information 1236.avi 1235.avi Remove Safe 1237.avi Favorites Setting Select T Tools R Return ❑ Play Current Group Using this menu, you can only play movie files in the currently selected sorting group. ❑ Copy / Copy Current Group / Copy the selected file (When multiple files are selected) Select the movie to copy. (Alternatively, select multiple files by pressing the Yellow button.) Press the TOOLS button to select Copy (or Copy Current Group / Copy the selected file). The files on the USB device are saved to the TV memory. N You can only copy the files saved on the USB device. N When the TV memory is full, files cannot be copied. ❑ Delete / Delete All / Delete Selected File (When multiple files are selected) Select the file to delete. (Alternatively, select multiple files by pressing the Yellow button.) Press the TOOLS button to select Delete (or Delete All / Delete Selected File). The files are deleted. N You can only delete the files saved in the TV memory. N You cannot recover a deleted file. ❑ Deselect All (When at least one file is selected) You can deselect all files. N The c mark indicating the corresponding file is selected is hidden. ❑ Information The movie file information including the name, the size, the date modified and the path is displayed. O Press the INFO button to viewing the information. ❑ Safe Remove You can remove the USB device safely from the TV. ¦ Playing a Movie File RF Playing a movie file 1. Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section. ▶ p 00:00:01 / 00:05:30 3/37 2. Pressing the ◄ or ► button to select a movie file to be played. 3. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button. N The selected file is played. N The selected file is displayed at the top with its playing time. N The playing duration of a movie file may be displayed as ‘00:00:00’ if its playing time information is not found at the start of the file. N You can watch exciting gaming multimedia files, but the gaming function is not supported. ABC.avi SUM E Pause ◀ ▶ Jump T Tools R Return English - 52 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 52 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:44 N Supported Subtitle Formats Name MPEG-4 time-based text SAMI SubRip SubViewer Micro DVD File extension .ttxt .smi .srt .sub .sub or .txt Format XML HTML string-based string-based string-based N Supported Movie Formats File extension Container *.avi AVI Audio codec Resolution Divx 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 Video Decoder 720x576 XviD MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 1920x1080 H.264 BP / MP / HP MPEG4 SP / ASP Motion JPEG *.mkv MKV 800x600 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP / MP / HP MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 800x600 720x576 H.264 BP / MP / HP MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM WMA Motion JPEG *.mp4 *.3gp ASF MP4 (SMP4) 3GPP *.vro VRO VOB *.mpg *.mpeg PS VC1 H.264 BP / MP / HP MPEG4 SP / ASP XVID H.264 BP / MP / HP MPEG4 SP / ASP MPEG2 MPEG1 MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2 *.ts *.tp *.trp TS 1920x1080 Motion JPEG MPEG4 SP / ASP *.wmv 1920x1080 Divx 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 XviD ASF 1920x1080 Divx 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 MPEG4 SP / ASP *.asf 1920x1080 H.264 VC1 1920x1080 1920x1080 1920x1080 800x600 WMA MP3 ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 1920x1080 1920x1080 1920x1080 ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 AC3 MPEG PCM 1920x1080 AAC MP3 1920x1080 1920x1080 1920x1080 1920x1080 1920x1080 1920x1080 N Video Play Control Buttons Button ENTERE ∂ ∑ TOOLS ∫ Wheel (◄ / ►) Wheel (▲ / ▼) μ Operations Play/Pause the movie file Play the movie file Pause the movie file Run various functions from the Movie menus. Exit play mode and return to the movie list. Skip forwards or backwards through the movie file. Move to the first/last of the file. Play the file at double speed. This function may not be supported depending on the movie file. English - 53 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 53 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:45 Playing the movie group 1. Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort key List Section. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard. 3. Press the ▼ or ENTERE button to move to the Group List Section. 4. Press the ∂ (Play) button. Only the files of the selected group will start playing. ● Alternatively 1. Select a Sort key and then in the File List Section, select the files contained in the desired group. N To move to the previous/next group, press the π (REW) or µ (FF) button. 2. Press the TOOLS button. 3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Play Current Group, then press the ENTERE button. N The movie files in the sorting group including the selected file are played. Playing the selected movie files 1. Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired movie file. 3. Press the Yellow button. N The c mark appears to the left of the selected movie file. N To deselect all selected files, press the TOOLS button and select Deselect All. 4. Repeat the above operation to select multiple movie files. 5. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button. N Only the selected file is played. Playing movie continuously (Resume Play) If you exit the playing movie function, the movie can be played later from the point where it was stopped. 1. Select the movie file you want to play continuously by pressing the ◄ or ► button to select it from the File List Section. 2. Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button. 3. Select Play Continuously (Resume Play) by pressing the Blue button. N The Movie will begin to play from where it was stopped. N If Continuous Movie Play Help function is set On in the Setup menu, a pop-up message will appear when you resume play a movie file. English - 54 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 54 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:45 ¦ Movie Play Option Menu Movie Play Option Menu Tools Repeat Mode ❑ Repeat Mode → On / Off ◀ On ▶ Picture Setting Sound Setting Picture Size You can play movie files repeatedly. : Fit Caption Setting Information Safe Remove ❑ Picture Setting / Sound Setting U Move L Adjust e Exit You can configure the picture and sound settings. ❑ Picture Size ■ Fit Play video at the TV screen size. ■ Original Play video at the original size. ❑ Caption Setting You can set the captions for the movie. ■ Caption → On / Off You can turn the captions for the movie on or off. ■ Caption Size → Small / Standard / Large You can change the font size of the captions. ■ Caption Sync You can adjust the caption sync. ■ Caption Sync Reset You can reset the adjusted caption sync. ❑ Information The movie file information is displayed. ❑ Safe Remove You can remove the USB device safely from the TV. English - 55 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 55 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:45 ¦ Using the Setup Menu Setup displays the user settings of the Media Play menu. SUM 1. Press the MEDIA.P button. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select Setup, then press the ENTERE button. 851.86MB/993.02MB Free SETUP 3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired option. 4. Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired option. N To exit Media Play mode, press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control. ■ Use Color View → On / Off You can select sorting photos by Color. If this option is set to On, the loading time may be increased to collect Color information from the photos. ■ Continuous Movie Play Help → On / Off Select to display the help pop-up message for continuous movie playback. ■ Get DivX® VOD registration code Shows the registration code authorized for the TV. If you connect to the DivX web site and register the registration code with a personal account, you can download the VOD registration file. If you play the VOD registration using Media Play, the registration is completed. N For more information on DivX® VOD, visit www.DivX.com. Photo SUM Music Movie Setup e Exit Device Use Color View ◀ Off Continuous Movie Play Help On Get DivX® VOD registration code ▶ Get DivX® VOD deactivation code Screen Saver Run Time 2 hours Information Safe Remove If this is set to ON, the loading time increases for collecting the Color information. SUM Device ■ Get DivX® VOD deactivation code When DivX® VOD is not registered, the registration deactivation code is displayed. If you execute this function when DivX® VOD is registered, the current DivX® VOD registration is deactivated. ■ Screen Saver Run Time → 2 hours / 4 hours / 8 hours / 10 hours / Off Select to set the waiting time before the screen saver appears. ■ Information Select to viewing the information of the connected device. ■ Safe Remove You can remove the USB device safely from the TV. U Move L Adjust R Return ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. English - 56 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 56 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:45 Media Play-DLNA ¦ Setting the DLNA Network DLNA allows you to view pictures and videos and listen to music saved on your PC or on your TV through a network connection in Media Play mode. This removes the need to copy them to a USB storage device and then connect the device to your TV. To use DLNA, the TV must be connected to the network and the DLNA application must be installed on your PC. Network Connection Diagram-Cable TV PC LAN LAN External Modem (ADSL/VDSL/Cable TV) Network Connection Diagram-Wireless TV PC or LAN Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter Wireless IP sharer LAN 1. For more information on how to configure your network, refer to ‘Setting the Network’. (see pages 34~36) N We recommend locating both TV and PC in same subnet. The first 3 parts of the subnet address of the TV and the PC IP addresses should be the same and only the last part (the host address) should be changed. (e.g. IP Address: 123.456.789.**) 2. Connect the PC to which the Samsung PC Share Manager program will be installed and the external modem using a LAN cable. N You can connect the TV to the PC directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router). English - 57 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 57 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:46 ¦ Installing the DLNA Application To play content on the PC on the TV, you have to first install the application. To use the DLNA function smoothly, use the program in the CD-ROM supplied with the TV or use the Samsung PC Share Manager program corresponding to the TV model that can be downloaded from the Samsung web site. System Requirements 1. Insert the Program CD supplied with this TV into your PC. 2. 30MB of free hard disk space is needed for the program installation. N If you share files, up to 30MB of hard disk drive space is required for each 100 files. N If you cancel file sharing, the hard disk drive space used for the thumbnail information is also freed. Supported Formats ● Image: JPEG/ Audio: MP3/ Video: AVI, MKV, ASF, MP4, 3GPP, PS, TS container. For detailed supported video formats, refer to the ‘Playing a Movie File’ instructions. (see page 53) Install the application 1. Run the Setup.exe file on the Program CD supplied with the product. N Alternatively, you can download the file from www.samsung.com. 2. Install the SAMSUNG PC Share Manager as shown in the figures. 3. When the installation is complete, the PC Share Manager icon appears on your Desktop. N Double-click the icon to run the program. English - 58 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 58 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:46 ¦ Using the DLNA Application The Program Screen Layout 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1. Menus: The following application menus are provided : File, Share, Server, and Help. 2. Click to share the selected PC server folder. 3. Click to cancel sharing. 4. Click to refresh the PC folder and files. 5. Click to synchronize the share status. 6. The folders and files of the PC to be shared are listed. 7. Folders shared by the user are listed. ❑ File ■ Property Shows information on the selected file or folder. ● Method 1: Select a file or folder and select the File menu and then select the Property sub-menu. ● Method 2: Select a file or folder, right-click over the selected file or folder and then select Property from the pop-up menu. <Method 1> ■ <Method 2> Exit Exits the DLNA application. If you select Exit without applying the changes after changing the shared status, a message will appear asking if you want to apply the changed settings to the PC. Select Yes to apply the changes and exit the application. English - 59 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 59 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:46 ❑ Share ■ Sharing a Folder You can share a folder from your PC to the TV. The maximum number of folders that can be shared is 32. N Your PC will operate as a server to the TV. ● Method 1: Select a folder in My Computer, select the Share menu and then select the Share Folder sub-menu. ● Method 2: Select a folder in My Computer, right-click over the selected folder and then select Share Folder from the popup menu. ● Method 3: Locate the mouse pointer over a folder in the My Computer folder list in the left pane and drag&drop the folder into the Shared Folders pane. If a message appears asking you to confirm the shared folder, select Yes. <Method 1> ■ <Method 3> Cancelling a Shared Folder You can cancel a shared folder on your PC. Select a folder from the Shared Folder pane and select Unshare Folder. ● Method 1: Select a folder from the Shared Folder pane, select the Share menu and then select Unshare Folder. ● Method 2: Select a folder from the Shared Folder pane, right-click over the selected folder and then select Unshare Folder from the pop-up menu. ● Method 3: Locate the mouse pointer over a folder in the Shared Folder pane and drag&drop the folder into the My Computer pane. If a message appears asking you to confirm the cancelation, select Yes. <Method 1> ■ <Method 2> <Method 2> <Method 3> Applying the Current Settings Perform this when synchronization is necessary due to a new shared folder or cancelling a shared folder. The Set Changed State menu applies changes to shared folders to the data saved with the PC share Program. Since applying changes to the internal data is a time-consuming process, this function enables users to apply changes to the data only when required. Until the Set Changed State menu is selected, the changed state of the shared folder is not applied to the server. Changes to the shared folders are not applied to your PC until you select the Set Changed State menu. ● Method 1: Select the Share menu and select the Refresh DB sub-menu. ● Method 2: Click the Set Changed State icon. <Method 1> <Method 2> English - 60 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 60 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:47 ■ Setting the Access Permission To enable the TV to find your PC, the TV must be set to Set Device Policy in the Access Permission Settings window. In addition, the PC server and the TV must be on the same subnet. ● Method: Select the Share menu and select Set Device Policy. Rejected items are represented in gray. You can change the access permissions by using the Allow Accept / Deny button. To delete an item, select the item and select Delete Item. ❑ Server ■ Server You can run or stop using your PC as a server. ■ Run DLNA Digital Media Server when Windows Starts You can determine whether to start the PC server automatically when Windows starts. ■ Change server name You can rename the PC server. Enter a new name and click OK. The new name will appear at the top right of the window and will appear on the TV. ❑ Help ■ Version The program version information message box appears. ¦ Using the DLNA Function Using the DLNA Menu DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) enables content saved on a DLNA server (usually your PC) connected to your TV or over a network to be played. Media Play enables playing content saved on a USB memory device connected to the TV, while DLNA enables playing content saved on a DLNA server (your PC) connected to your TV or over the network. N If you install the PC share manager program supplied with the TV onto a PC, you can have the PC perform the role of a DLNA server over the network. N For detailed procedures on using the DLNA menu, refer to the ‘Media Play’ instructions. (see pages 40~56) 1. Press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control to display the DLNA menu. 2. Press the ◄ or ► button to select an icon (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup), then press the ENTERE button. N To exit DLNA mode, press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control. N DLNA does not support the following functions. The Background Music and Background Music Setting functions. Sorting files by preference in the Photo, Music, and Movie folders. The Change Group Info function. The Copy / Delete function. The Safe Remove function. The REW/FF (π/µ) key functions while a movie is playing. Playing Movie Continuously (Resume Play) function. N The Skip function may not work with some container such as asf and mkv. N The Divx DRM, Multi-audio, embedded caption does not supported. N Samsung PC Share manager should be permitted by the firewall program on your PC. N The Skip (◄/► keys) or Pause function may not work while a movie is playing for the DLNA of other manufacturers, depending on the corresponding content information. N The playing time may not be displayed while a movie is playing. English - 61 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 61 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:47 ANYNET+ ¦ Connecting Anynet+ Devices What is Anynet+? Anynet+ is a function that enables you to control all connected Samsung devices that support Anynet+ with your Samsung TV’s remote. The Anynet+ system can be used only with Samsung devices that have the Anynet+ feature. To be sure your Samsung device has this feature, check if there is an Anynet+ logo on it. To connect to a TV TV Anynet+ Device 2 Anynet+ Device 1 HDMI 1. Cable HDMI 1. Cable Anynet+ Device HDMI 1. Cable Anynet+ Device 4 HDMI 1. Cable 1. Connect the HDMI IN (1(DVI), 2, or 4) jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using an HDMI cable. To connect to Home Theater TV Anynet+ Device 1 Home Theater Optical Cable HDMI 1. Cable Anynet+ Device 2 HDMI 1. Cable Anynet+ Device HDMI 1. Cable Anynet+ Device 4 HDMI 1. Cable 1. Connect the HDMI IN (1(DVI), 2, or 4) jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using an HDMI cable. 2. Connect the HDMI IN jack of the home theater and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using an HDMI cable. N Connect the Optical cable between the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on your TV and the Digital Audio Input on the Home Theater. N When following the connection above, the Optical jack only outputs 2 channel audio. You will only hear sound from the Home Theater’s Front Left and Right speakers and the subwoofer. If you want to hear 5.1 channel audio, connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on the DVD / Satellite Box (ie Anynet Device 1 or 2) directly to the Amplifier or Home Theater, not the TV. N Connect only one Home Theater. N You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI 1.3 cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions. N Anynet+ works when the AV device supporting Anynet+ is in the Standby or On status. N Anynet+ supports up to 12 AV devices in total. Note that you can connect up to 3 devices of the same type. English - 62 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 62 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:48 ¦ Setting Up Anynet+ Media Play (USB & DLNA) Application T Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu. You can also display the Anynet+ menu by selecting Tools → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Content Library Internet@TV Home Network Center ❑ Setup ■ ■ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) → Off / On To use the Anynet+ Function, Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) must be set to On. N When the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) function is disabled, all the Anynet+ related operations are deactivated. Auto Turn Off → No / Yes Setting an Anynet+ Device to turn Off automatically when the TV is turned Off. N The active source on the TV remote must be set to TV to use the Anynet+ function. N If you set Auto Turn Off to Yes, connected external devices are also turned off when the TV is turned off. If an external device is still recording, it may or may not turn off. Setup Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) : On ▶ Auto Turn Off : Yes U Move E Enter R Return Setup Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) : On Auto Turn Off : Yes ▶ U Move E Enter R Return ¦ Switching between Anynet+ Devices 1. Press the TOOLS button. Press the ENTERE button to select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Device List, then press the ENTERE button. N Anynet+ devices connected to the TV are listed. N If you cannot find a device you want, press the red button to scan for devices. View TV Device List Recording: DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Receiver: Off Setup 3. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a particular device and press the ENTERE button. It is switched to the selected device. N Only when you set Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) to On in the Application menu, the Device List menu appears. U Move E Enter R Return N Switching to the selected devices may take up to 2 minutes. You cannot cancel the operation during the switching operation. N The time required to scan for devices is determined by the number of connected devices. N When the device scan is complete, the number of devices found are not displayed. N Although the TV automatically searches the device list when the TV is turned on via the power button, devices connected to the TV may not always be automatically displayed in the device list. Press the red button to search for the connected device. N If you have selected external input mode by pressing the SOURCE button, you cannot use the Anynet+ function. Make sure to switch to an Anynet+ device by using the Device List. Anynet+ Menu The Anynet+ menu changes depending on the type and status of the Anynet+ devices connected to the TV. Anynet+ Menu View TV Device List (device_name) MENU (device_name) INFO Recording: (*recorder) Stop Recording: (*recorder) Receiver Description Anynet+ mode changes to TV broadcast mode. Shows the Anynet+ device list. Shows the connected device menus. E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the disc menu of the DVD recorder will appear. Shows the play menu of the connected device. E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the play menu of the DVD recorder will appear. Starts recording immediately using the recorder. (This is only available for devices that support the recording function.) Stops recording. Sound is played through the receiver. N If more than one recording device is connected, they are displayed as (*recorder) and if only one recording device is connected, it will be represented as (*device_name). English - 63 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 63 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:48 TV Remote Control Buttons Available in Anynet+ Mode Device Type Operating Status Available Buttons Anynet+ Device After switching to the device, when the menu of the corresponding device is displayed on the screen. Numeric buttons Wheel (▲/▼/◄/►) / ENTERE buttons Color buttons / EXIT button Device with built-in Tuner Audio Device After switching to the device, while playing a file After switching to the device, when you are watching a TV program When Receiver is activated π(Backward search) / μ(Forward search) / ∫(Stop) / ∂(Play) / ∑(Pause) z button y / MUTE button N The Anynet+ function only works when the active source on the TV remote control is set to TV. N The ∏ button works only while in the recordable state. N You cannot control Anynet+ devices using the buttons on the TV. You can control Anynet+ devices only using the TV remote control. N The TV remote control may not work under certain conditions. If this occurs, reselect the Anynet+ device. N The Anynet+ functions do not operate with other manufacturers’ products. N The π, μ operations may differ depending on the device. ¦ Recording You can make a recording of a TV program using a Samsung recorder. 1. Press the TOOLS button. Press the ENTERE button to select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Recording Immediately and press the ENTERE button. Recording begins. N When there is more than one recording device When multiple recording devices are connected, the recording devices are listed. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a recording device and press the ENTERE button. Recording begins. N When the recording device is not displayed select Device List and press the Red button to search devices View TV Device List Recording: DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Receiver: Off Setup U Move E Enter R Return 3. Press the EXIT button to exit. N You can record the source streams by selecting Recording: (device_name). N Pressing the ∏ button will record whatever you are currently watching. If you are watching video from another device, the video from the device is recorded. N Before recording, check whether the antenna jack is properly connected to the recording device. To properly connect an antenna to a recording device, refer to the recording device’s users manual. ¦ Listening through a Receiver (Home Theater) You can listen to sound through a receiver instead of the TV speaker. 1. Press the TOOLS button. Press the ENTERE button to select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Receiver. Press the ◄ or ► button to select On or Off. View TV Device List Recording: DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO Receiver: Off Setup 3. Press the EXIT button to exit. N If your receiver supports audio only, it may not appear in the device list. N The receiver will work when you have properly connected the optical in jack of the receiver to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack of the TV. U Move E Enter R Return N When the receiver (home theater) is set to On, you can hear sound output from the TV’s Optical jack. When the TV is displaying a DTV(air) signal, the TV will send out 5.1 channel sound to the Home Theater receiver. When the source is a digital component such as a DVD and is connected to the TV via HDMI, only 2 channel sound will be heard from the Home Theater receiver. N If there is a power interruption to the TV when the Receiver is set to On (by disconnecting the power cord or a power failure), the Speaker Select may be set to External Speaker when you turn the TV on again. English - 64 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 64 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:48 ¦ Troubleshooting for Anynet+ Problem Anynet+ does not work. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● I want to start Anynet+. ● ● ● I want to exit Anynet+. ● ● ● The message ‘Connecting to Anynet+ device...’ appears on the screen. The Anynet+ device does not play. The connected device is not displayed. ● ● ● ● Check whether or not the device supports Anynet+ functions. Check whether or not the HDMI 1.3 cable is properly connected. Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu. Search Anynet+ devices again. You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI 1.3 cable only. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions. If it is terminated by an abnormal situation such as disconnecting the HDMI cable or power cord or a power failure, please repeat the device scan. Check whether the antenna jack on the recording device is properly connected. ● Connect the optical cable between TV and the receiver. ● ● ● ● ● ● The TV program cannot be recorded. The TV sound is not output through the receiver. Possible Solution Check if the device is an Anynet+ device. The Anynet+ system supports Anynet+ devices only. Connect only one receiver (home theater). Check if the Anynet+ device power cord is properly connected. Check the Anynet+ device’s Video/Audio/HDMI 1.3 cable connections. Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu. Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode. Check whether it is Anynet+ exclusive remote control. Anynet+ doesn’t work in certain situations. (Searching channels, Operating Media Play, Plug & Play, etc.) When connecting or removing the HDMI 1.3 cable, please make sure to search devices again or turn your TV off and on again. Check if the Anynet+ Function of Anynet+ device is set on. Check if the Anynet+ device is properly connected to the TV and check if the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ Setup menu. Press the TV button on the TV remote control to switch to TV. Then press the TOOLS button to show the Anynet+ menu and select a menu you want. Select View TV in the Anynet+ menu. Press the SOURCE button on the TV remote control and select a device other than Anynet+ devices. Press z, CH LIST, PRE-CH, and FAV.CH to change the TV mode. (Note that the channel button operates only when a tuner-embedded Anynet+ device is not connected.) You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynet+ or switching to a view mode. Use the remote control when the Anynet+ setting or switching to view mode is complete. You cannot use the play function when Plug & Play is in progress. English - 65 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 65 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:48 CONTENT LIBRARY ¦ Using the Content Library MediaPlay(USB&DLNA) Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) Application The Content Library allows you to enjoy various content on your TV. You can use the default content stored in the TV memory or you can enjoy new content using a USB device or via the Internet. ContentLibrary Internet@TV HomeNetworkCenter Using the Content Library Menu 1. Press the MENU button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Application, then press the ENTERE button. 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Content Library, then press the ENTERE button. N The Content Library main menu is displayed. Gallery . Press the ◄ or ► button to select an icon (Gallery, Cooking, Game, Children, Wellness, Others, Content Management), then press the ENTERE button. Gallery Cooking Game Children Wellness RReturneExit Using the Remote Control Button in Content Library Menu Button Wheel (▲/▼/◄/►) ENTERE RETURN EXIT z Color buttons y / MUTE Operations Move the cursor and select an item. Select the currently selected item. Return to the previous menu. Stop the current function and return to the Content Library main menu. Stop Content Library mode and Returns to TV mode. Keys that provide functions are described on the corresponding page. You can control the volume of the played content. CONTENT LIBRARY CONTAINS TEXT, GRAPHICS, IMAGES, MULTIMEDIA, AND OTHER MATERIALS FOR INFORMATIONAL AND PROMOTIONAL PURPOSES ONLY. MATERIALS IN CONTENT LIBRARY HAS BEEN MODIFIED AND KEEPS BEING REVISED AND UPDATED. THE MATERIALS IN THE CONTENT LIBRARY MAY NOT BE SUITABLE FOR ALL AUDIENCES. INFORMATION IN THE CONTENT LIBRARY IS PROVIDED ‘AS IS.’ ALTHOUGH THE INFORMATION PROVIDED TO YOU IN THE CONTENT LIBRARY IS OBTAINED OR COMPLIED FROM SOURCES WE BELIEVE TO BE RELIABLE, SAMSUNG CANNOT AND DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY INFORMATION OR DATA MADE AVAILABLE TO YOU FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE HELD LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR THE USE OF, THE CONTENT LIBRARY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. English - 66 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 66 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:48 ¦ Using the TV Memory Contents You can use enjoy content stored in the TV memory. You can add/delete content to/from the TV memory. To add/delete content, select Content Management. N To return to Content Library main menu, press the EXIT button. N The volume display does not appear but you can control the volume. ❑ Gallery This function plays a SlideShow with high resolution images and background music and produces various atmospheres. Using the Gallery function of the TV, you can change your home atmosphere. Gallery N The copyrights of the Gallery contents and all issues related to them are reserved by TimeSpace, Inc. N Press the ENTERE button to pause the SlideShow, and also press the ENTERE button RReturneExit to resume the SlideShow. N Press the INFO button to display information on the selected photo. (This is not displayed if the photo has no information.) Gallery Cooking Game Children Wellness ❑ Cooking You can view various recipes and then easily follow them step by step. Enjoy these contents which will give you great ideas for meals. N The recipes introduced in the Cooking contents on the Samsung TV are based on recipes published by Anness Publishing. N The copyrights of the Cooking contents and all issues related to them are reserved by Practical Pictures. ❑ Game This category provides entertainment games for the whole family. N For the buttons used in the games, refer to the directions on the screen. N Color Buttons for Games Button Red Green Yellow Blue Operations Press to move to the game home screen Press to pause the game Option Key Press to exit the game ❑ Children This is educational and interactive content that children can watch repeatedly. N The copyrights of the Children contents and issues related to them reserved by UpToTen. ❑ Wellness This is beneficial health management content that provides stretching and massage exercises that can be enjoyed by the whole family. ❑ Others The default content is not saved in the TV memory. N You can copy new content to the TV memory using the Content Management screen. English - 67 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 67 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:49 ¦ Using the Content Management ❑ Content Management You can add or delete contents using the Content Management. N You can select multiple content items by selecting content items repeatedly and pressing the Yellow button. ■ ■ ■ My Contents You can check the content saved in the TV memory for each subitem of the Content Library. ● Select a content item and press the ENTERE button. You can play or delete the selected content item. Internet Download If your TV connect to the internet via a LAN cable, you can directly download the contents provided by Samsung Electronics. ● Select a content item and press the ENTERE button. You can play the selected content item or copy it to the TV memory. Content Management Game Children Wellness Others Content Management RReturneExit ContentManagement>MyContents 1/1 MyContents Gallery InternetDownload Cooking USB Game Children Setup Wellness Others TVMemory 17.16GB/189.00MBAvailable RReturneExit USB You can check the content saved on the USB device for each subitem of the Content Library. ● Select a content item and press the ENTERE button. You can play the selected content item or copy it to the TV memory. N Content Library only supports USB Mass Storage Class devices (MSC). MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport device. Examples of MSC are Thumb drives and Flash Card Readers. N Playing a game using an external USB memory device will allow you to save your game (depending on the game). Take care as removing the USB memory device while saving data to the USB memory device may cause the data to be lost. N Downloading New Contents New content other than the built-in content will be provided via the Samsung. com website free of charge. When you download the paid contents, you need UDN number to download contents. Check the UDN number before downloading a new content item. ● Downloading Content 1. Visit the www.samsung.com website. 2. Select a content item in the Contents Download page. . Download the contents onto the USB memory device. 4. Go to Content Library main menu by pressing CONTENT button or choosing Content Library (MENU → Application → Content Library). . Plug the USB memory into USB port on the side of the TV. 6. You can see the content sub item which you downloaded. 7. Select a content item and press the ENTERE button. 8. You can play the selected content item or copy it to the TV memory. ■ Setup ● Screen Saver Run Time: Select to set the waiting time before the screen saver appears. ● Save UDN: Saves the UDN number to a USB device. N An NTFS format USB storage device does not support saving UDN. We recommend using a FAT format USB storage device. English - 68 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 68 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:49 Internet@TV You can enjoy the best of the Internet in perfect harmony with the simplicity and reliability of your television. If you have some problems while using a widget service, please contact the content provider. In the widget, press the green button to get contact information or refer to help website for the widget provider information. N In some regions, only English may be supported for services. ¦ Getting Started with Internet@TV Internet@TV provides an integrated Internet and television experience powered by the Yahoo!® Widget Engine. You can monitor financial stocks, share photos with friends and family, and track news and weather all through the Internet@TV service on your television. N You may experience slow operation or hesitation when using this function due to network conditions. When running Internet@TV for the first time, the basic settings proceed automatically. N The first step is to set up your network. For more information on how to configure your network, refer to ‘Setting the Network’. (see pages 34~36) N After your network is operational, the Internet@TV software guides you through a step-by-step setup wizard. ❑ What is a Widget? A TV Widget is a small web application that allows you to easily access your favorite site using the remote control. You can enjoy various types of information, such as the latest news, weather information, and stock information, etc. on your TV along with your friends or family members. N Some widgets may not be supported depending on the regulations of the corresponding country. N Some widgets will only support limited services depending on the regulations of the corresponding country. N The color buttons may work differently depending on the widget. N The operation may not be smooth depending on the network condition. ❑ What is a Snippet? A snippet shows a part of the Widget contents such as weather and stock information that you want to view. N The snippets are automatically updated in real time. N It may take a few seconds to load the snippet. 1. Press the MENU button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Application, then press the ENTERE button. 2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Internet@TV, then press the ENTERE button. N Internet@TV starts. O Press the INTERNET@ button on the remote control to display the Internet@ TV menu. 3. The General Disclaimer is displayed on the screen. Select I accept or I do not accept. N For more information on the General Disclaimer, refer to the ‘Legal Notice’. (see page 37) Yahoo! TV Widgets bring the best of the internet to your TV! You can get updated weather conditions or sports scores, get updated information on stocks, or even view full-screen photos and video! 4. The ‘welcome screen’ is the starting point of the Internet@TV guided setup. N If you select Exit Setup, this step is resumed when you press the INTERNET@ button. N Select Let’s get started! 5. Choosing your location allows TV Widgets to use localized content. N Select your country from the list provided. 1 Welcome to Yahoo!® TV Widgets! We just need to get a few things set up, and you’ll be on your way! Let’s get started! Exit setup RF English - 69 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 69 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:49 6. Accepting the Yahoo!® TV Widget Engine Privacy Policy is required to use Internet@TV. N Select OK, I Accept. 7. Accepting the Yahoo!® TV Widget System Terms of Service is required to use Internet@TV. N Select OK, I Accept. 8. Enter your name to setup your profile. Each profile has its own list of widgets. You can create a profile for each person who uses Internet@TV. N Enter your name and select Save this name. N For more information, refer to ‘Using the Profile Widget’. (see page 72) What’s your name? 9. Internet@TV tests the network connection. N If the test fails, configure your network again. N For more information, refer to ‘Setting the Network’. (see pages 34~36) 5 Each person in the house who uses the TV can have their own personalized set of widgets. 10.The guided setup is complete. A tutorial on how to use Internet@TV is next. N Select Continue to view the tutorial. N Select Exit setup to start using Internet@TV now. N To run the tutorial again, select Profile Widget → System Setting → Repeat Tutorial. We’ll keep track of these individual widget profiles by the name you enter, Enter the name YOU want to use now. Save this name Skip this step Exit setup 11. Press the INTERNET@ button on the remote control to display the Internet@TV user interface. ❑ Screen display ■ Dock mode 1 A welcome banner is shown with your profile name in the top right corner. N This banner disappears after a short delay. 2 The banner highlights two remote control shortcuts. N If you press the blue button (Viewport) on your remote control, the display is toggled between ‘Viewport mode’ and ‘Overlay mode’. In Viewport mode, the TV or video plays in a scaled-down area with graphics outside. In overlay mode, the graphics are displayed on top of the TV or video. N If you press the yellow button (Edit Snippet) on your remote control, a help window is displayed and the snippet with focus can be edited. 1 2 3 Hello John! 5:15 AM Mon January 19th Viewport Edit Snippet 3 Signed in as John WEATHER Widget Gallery FINANCE 3 Press the INTERNET@ button on the remote control to begin. N The horizontal list at the bottom of your TV screen is called ‘the dock’. N The items in the list are called ‘snippets’. N A snippet is a shortcut which launches a TV Widget. N A TV Widget is an Internet application designed to run on your TV. N Move between snippets by pressing the ◄ or ► buttons on the remote control. N Focus is located in the left-most region (highlighted in blue). N The dock slides snippets under that focal point. N Launch a TV Widget by pressing the ENTERE button on the remote control when its snippet is in focus. N When you add snippets, they form a stack which you can navigate by pressing the ▲ or ▼ buttons. N Two special TV Widgets appear in the dock: the Profile Widget and the Widget Gallery. These cannot be deleted. N The dock will slide off screen after a timeout period. English - 70 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 70 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:50 ■ Sidebar mode 1 Focus on a snippet and press the ENTERE button to launch the TV Widget sidebar. The TV Widget logo and Home are at the top of the sidebar. 2 Current menu is displayed under the TV Widget logo. N To return to a previous screen, select it and press the ENTERE button. N You can also press the RETURN button on the remote control. 3 Current selection is always highlighted in blue and is activated when you press the ENTERE button. 4 When there is a lot of data, a page control is used. N Current page and total pages are displayed. N Move between pages by pressing ◄ or ► buttons. FINANCE My Stocks To remove a stocks symbol, please select it from the list below. 1 2 ^DJI ^IXIC YHOO AAPL INTC AMZN PAGE 1 OF 2 Add New Symbol... Import Symbols From Yahoo!... Display Format Value About Yahoo! Finance... 3 4 5 5 The bottom toolbar includes color buttons that correspond to the red, green, yellow and blue buttons on the remote control. Red button: Close the widget. Green button: Change the widget’s setting. Yellow button: Manage your snippets. Blue button: Size video to fit, or make it full screen. N Some buttons may not be available depending on the widget. All content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual property laws. Such content and services are provided solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may not use any content or services in a manner that has not been authorized by the content owner or service provider. Without RF limiting the foregoing, unless expressly authorized by the applicable content owner or service provider, you may not modify, copy, republish, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, create derivative works, exploit, or distribute in any manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device. YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE AND ACCURACY IS WITH YOU. THE DEVICE AND ALL THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE DEVICE AND ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS OR, IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE DEVICE, CONTENT OR SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT OPERATION OF THE DEVICE OR SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR AS A RESULT OF THE USE OF THE DEVICE, OR ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE ACCESSED BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Third party services may be changed, suspended, removed, terminated or interrupted, or access may be disabled at any time, without notice, and Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any period of time. Content and services are transmitted by third parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over which Samsung has no control. Without limiting the generality of this disclaimer, Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any change, interruption, disabling, removal of or suspension of any content or service made available through this device. Samsung may impose limits on the use of or access to certain services or content, in any case and without notice or liability. Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the content and services. Any question or request for service relating to the content or services should be made directly to the respective content and service providers. English - 71 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 71 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:50 ¦ Editing Snippets in the Dock 1. Edit a snippet while it is highlighted in the dock by pressing the yellow button. 2. The snippet moves to the Second position and its tile slides up to show the following help text: Delete (red button): Remove this TV Widget. N Deleted widgets can be re-installed using the Widget Gallery. Move (blue button): Re-order the snippet. Press the ◄ or ► button to scroll. Press the yellow button to drop into the new position. Done (yellow button): Exit the Edit Snippet menu. ¦ Using the Profile Widget The Profile Widget configures your user profile. You can set up multiple profiles, and each profile maintains its own list of widgets. The Switch Profile menu allows you to switch to a different user profile. N At least two profiles must be registered. If you want to add a profile, refer to ‘Administrative Controls’. (see page 73) PROFILE Signed in as John Switch Profile Profile Settings System Settings Administrative Controls Sign out of Yahoo! The Profile Settings menu allows you to customize and protect your profile. PROFILE Profile Settings User profiles can be customized with a unique Name and an Avatar (a picture used to represent your profile). ● Your profile’s Name and Avatar are displayed in the profile snippet in the dock. ● Profiles can be protected by Create Profile PIN. N When setting the PIN for the first time, you can set a Security Question. ● The Profile Settings menu can limit access to widgets. ● If you forget your Profile PIN you can answer a Security Question that is associated with your profile. ● A profile that has the Limit Profile indicator turned on will not allow new widgets to be installed. N The Owner PIN must be set to use this function. To set the Owner PIN, refer to ‘Administrative Controls’. (see page 73) John Name Avatar Create Profile PIN Security Question Security Answer Limit Profile Off Done Cancel English - 72 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 72 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:50 The System Settings menu allows you to: ● Change your Location and set your Zip Code (US only) to tailor the content to your region. ● Repeat Tutorial that was shown during guided setup. ● Restore Factory Settings to delete all widget configurations and information. In the Administrative Controls menu you can: ● Set the Screen Saver timeout to avoid screen burn in. ● Create Owner PIN and set a Security Question to control other profiles. ● Create a new Profile which can be configured with a different set of widgets. ● Delete an existing profile. From the Profile Widget you can Sign in to Yahoo!® using your Yahoo! ID. ● If you have a Yahoo! ID, you can access your personalized content using the Yahoo!® TV Widgets. ● All Yahoo!® TV Widgets that are installed are automatically signed-in with your profile’s Yahoo! ID. ● If you have no Yahoo! account, visit www.yahoo.com and create an account. ● You may fail to log in with an ID created on the Yahoo website in a country that does not support Internet@TV. PROFILE System Settings Location Repeat Tutorial Restore Factory Settings PROFILE Administrative Controls Screen Saver 240 Minutes Create Owner PIN Create Profile Remove Profile PROFILE Sign in to access your Yahoo! data for Signed in as the Yahoo! Widgets in this profile. Use the Profile Widget to sign John out. Yahoo! ID a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 .@# Profile ãéì Switch ❑ For information on the Profile widget space Next Settings Profile Press the green button. You can view a brief description of the Profile Widget, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service, and Privacy Policy. Cancel System Settings Administrative Controls Sign out of Yahoo! English - 73 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 73 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:50 ¦ Using the Yahoo!® Widget Gallery Use the Yahoo!® Widget Gallery to add more widgets to your TV. View available TV Widgets in the following categories: ● Latest Widgets: Displays recently updated widgets. ● Yahoo!® Widgets: Displays widgets provided by Yahoo!®. ● Samsung Widgets: Displays widgets provided by Samsung. ● More Categories: Displays all widgets by category. N To install a widget, navigate to the detail screen and select Add Widget to My Profile and press the ENTERE button. The widget is installed and becomes available in the dock. Widget Gallery Yahoo! News V 0.9.0 by Yahoo! NEWS HEADLINES Top Stories PAGE 1 OF 2 Business Politics Sports Technology NEWS More Categories Latest Widgets Yahoo! Widgets Samsung Widgets Categories ❑ Widget Gallery Settings Widget Gallery Press the Green button. Settings ■ About Yahoo! Widget Gallery You can view brief information for the Widget Gallery, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service, and Privacy Policy. ■ In the Developer Settings menu, you can make your own widget. For more information on creating your own widget, visit http://connectedtv. yahoo.com/ About Yahoo! Widget Gallery... Developer Settings English - 74 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 74 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:51 ¦ Using the Yahoo!® Weather Widget The Yahoo!® Weather Widget provides updates on your local and favorite weather locations. This content dynamically changes with weather conditions. ● Press the green button on the remote control to display the Yahoo!® Weather Widget Settings menu. ● From the Settings menu you can add or remove a city for which you want to view weather information. From the Settings menu: ● Add New City by entering the name of the city. Once the search results are displayed, select the city you want and press the ENTERE button. ● Delete City by selecting the city you want to delete from the city list. Press the ENTERE button and confirm the deletion. ● Changing the Temperature Indication Mode You can change the temperature indication mode to Imperial or Metric. For example, Imperial will show temperatures in Fahrenheit and Metric in Celsius. WEATHER 51° Sunnyvale Cloudy Sunnyvale, CA San Francisco, CA New York, NY London, England Paris, France ❑ Create a snippet for a favorite city ● ● ● Select the city from the Yahoo!® Weather Widget’s home page and view the detailed weather information. Press the yellow button. Select the Add Snippet menu and press ENTERE to add the city as a snippet. ❑ Delete a snippet for a city ● ● ● Launch the snippet. Press the yellow button. Select the Delete Snippet menu and press ENTERE to remove the snippet. ¦ Using the Yahoo!® News Widget The Yahoo!® News Widget provides the latest headline news for business, entertainment, politics, sports, top stories, and many other categories. ● NEWS Select a category, select a headline within the category, and view a dynamically updated news summary. World English - 75 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 75 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:51 ¦ Using the Yahoo!® Flickr Widget The Flickr Widget can provide you access to your favorite photos from friends and family while watching TV. Share your photos with your family on your big screen TV through a slideshow. ● Personalize the Flickr Widget by logging in with your Yahoo! ID. ● For detailed procedures on log in, refer to the ‘Using the Profile Widget’ instructions. (see pages 72~73) ● For more information on Flickr, visit http://www.flickr.com. N Your Photos shows photos you have registered with Flickr website. Your Photos Your Sets Explore Favorite Photos Your Contacts Your Groups ■ To view Flickr photos in a slideshow: ● Select a thumbnail of a photo and press the ENTERE button to view the photo’s details. ● Select Start Slideshow and press the ENTERE button. ■ To control the slideshow display: ● Press the ENTERE button during a slideshow. ● The thumbnails of photos are displayed on the bottom of the screen. N When the slideshow control is displayed, you can Pause, Play and Stop the slideshow. N If you select the menu and press ENTERE, you can view information for the selected photo. ● The Your Sets menu allows you to view photos you have classified in Flickr. ● The Explore menu allows you to explore photos featured by the Flickr website. You can view the photos updated daily. ● The Mark as Favorite or Remove From Favorite menu moves photos to your Favorite Photos set or removes photos from it. ● The Favorite Photos menu allows you to see the photos you have classified as favorites. ● The Your Contacts menu allows you to see updates from family and friends. The Your Groups menu allows you to select your favorite groups from the Flickr website to share and enjoy photos with the Flickr community of users. To configure the Yahoo!® Flickr Widget Settings press the green button on the remote control. ● The Time Per Slide menu controls the speed of the slideshow. ● The Repeat menu will restart the slideshow at the beginning after the last photo is shown. English - 76 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 76 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:51 ¦ Using the Yahoo!® Finance Widget View stock information and the latest stock news with the Yahoo!® Finance Widget. Press the green button to set up your stocks. Use the Add New Symbol menu to enter the name of a new stock. ● Select the stock you want to add from the search results and select the Add Symbol menu and press the ENTERE button. N The selected stock is added to the My Stocks list. ● ● ● ● Use the Import Symbols From Yahoo!® menu to retrieve your Yahoo!® Finance portfolio. The Merge Symbols menu merges the symbols in the Yahoo!® Finance Widget with the symbols from your portfolio. The Replace Symbols menu deletes the symbols in the Yahoo!® Finance Widget and replaces them with the symbols from your portfolio. FINANCE My Stocks To remove a stocks symbol, please select it from the list below. ^DJI ^IXIC YHOO AAPL INTC AMZN PAGE 1 OF 2 Add New Symbol... Import Symbols From Yahoo!... Display Format Value About Yahoo! Finance... Use the Display Format menu to change the stock-price fluctuation transition to Value or Percentage. Create a snippet for a favorite stock. Select the stock symbol from the Yahoo!® Finance Widget’s home page and view the detailed finance information. Press the yellow button. Select the Add Snippet menu and press ENTERE to add the stock as a snippet. Delete a snippet Launch the snippet from the dock Press the yellow button. Select the Delete Snippet menu and press ENTERE to remove the snippet. ¦ Troubleshooting for Internet@TV Problem Possible Solution Some widget services do not work. Check with that service provider. In the widget, press the green button and get contact information or refer to help website for widget service provider information. Refer to Help website page. Some widget contents only have English. How can I change the language? Widget content language may be different from the widget user interface language. It depends on the service provider. After factory reset, the Yahoo Widget service doesn’t work and a warning message is displayed. After factory reset, turn your TV on and off. Then restart Internet@TV. At the Flickr widget, I logged in my account. But, I can’t view my picture. Visit the Yahoo Web site, and activate your Flickr account at your Yahoo! ID. At the Profile widget, I changed the location, but the previous setting still remains. Turn your TV off and on, then access Internet@TV again. Now, you can enjoy widget services in the changed location. ¦ Help Website Country Website USA www.samsung.com → consumer products → Television → [email protected] → Internet@TV Canada www.samsung.com → consumer products → TV → [email protected] → Internet@TV www.samsung.com → produits grand public → téléviseurs → [email protected] → Internet@TV Mexico www.samsung.com → productos de consumo → televisores → [email protected] → Internet@TV N The location of Internet@TV on the website may vary by country and/or change in the future. English - 77 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 77 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:51 Home Network Center The Home Network Center allows your mobile phone to communicate with your TV. ¦ Home Network Center About the Home Network Center The Home Network Center connects the TV and mobile phones through a network. You can view call arrivals, text message contents, and schedules set on the mobile phone on the TV using the Home Network Center. In addition, you can play the media contents saved on the mobile phones such as videos, photos and music by controlling them onto the TV via the network. N If the device supports DLNA DMC (Digital Media Controller) function, Home Network Center function is available. N For more information, visit www.samsung.com or contact the Samsung call center. The mobile device may need additional software installation. For details, refer to the phone’s user’s guide. Connecting to the Home Network Center For more information about the network settings, refer to ‘Setting the Network’. (see pages 34~36) ● Connecting through a Wi-Fi Ad-hoc Network 1. Connect the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ to the USB 1 (HDD) or USB 2 port of the TV. TV Rear Panel Mobile phone or Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter 2. For more information on how to configure Ad-hoc network, refer to ‘Setting the Network’. (see page 36) N For information on configuring the mobile phone’s network settings, refer to the mobile phone manual. 3. Set up the IP address, SSID and password for the mobile phone in the Ad-hoc Settings of the mobile phone using the Network Name (SSID) and Security Key (password) displayed on the TV. ● Connecting through a wired/wireless IP sharer 1. Connect the LAN port of the TV and the Wired/Wireless IP sharer using the LAN cable or connect the USB 1 (HDD) or USB 2 port of the TV and the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’. N For the procedures to set up the wired/wireless sharer and the mobile phone, refer to the manual of the corresponding device. Using the LAN cable Mobile phone Wired/Wireless IP sharer LAN Cable Using the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter TV Rear Panel Wired/Wireless IP sharer or Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter Mobile phone LAN Cable English - 78 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 78 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:52 ¦ Setting Up the Home Network Center ❑ Message Shows a list of mobile phones which have been set up with this TV to use the message function (the call arrivals, text message contents and schedules set on the mobile phone). ■ Allowed Allows the mobile phone. Home Network Center Message 111-1234-5671 : Allowed Media 111-1234-5672 : Allowed Setup 111-1234-5673 : Denied 111-1234-5674 : Denied ■ Denied Blocks the mobile phone. ■ Delete Deletes the mobile phone from the list. N This function just deletes the name from the list. If the deleted mobile device turns on or tries to connect to the TV, it may be shown on the list. R Return e Exit ❑ Media Shows a list of mobile phones which is available to control media contents (videos, photos, music) from the phone. N Besides mobile phone, other mobile devices that support DLNA DMC are available. ■ Allowed Allows the mobile phone. Home Network Center Message 111-1234-5671 : Allowed Media 111-1234-5672 : Allowed Setup 111-1234-5673 : Denied 111-1234-5674 : Denied ■ Denied Blocks the mobile phone. ■ Delete Deletes the mobile phone from the list. N This function just deletes the corresponding name on the list. If the deleted mobile device turns on or tries to connect to the TV, it may be shown on the list. R Return e Exit ❑ Setup ■ ■ ■ Message → On / Off You can determine whether to use the message function (the call arrivals, text message contents, and schedules set on the mobile phone). Media → On / Off You can select whether to use the Media function that plays the contents (videos, photos, music) from the mobile phone. TV name You can set the TV name so as to find it easily on the mobile device. N If you selects User Input, you can type the TV name by OSK(On Screen Keyboard). Home Network Center Message Message : On Media Media : On Setup TV name : TV R Return e Exit English - 79 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 79 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:53 ¦ Using the Message Function Using this function, you can view the call arrivals, text message contents and schedules set on the mobile phone through the alarm window while watching TV. N To disable this Message alarm window, set Message to Off in Setup of the Home Network Center. N The alarm window appears for 20 seconds. If no key is pressed or if Cancel is selected, it appears up to three times at 5 minute intervals. N If OK is selected, or if OK is not selected while the message is displayed three times, the message will be deleted. The message is not deleted from the mobile phone. N The simple alarm window can be displayed, while using some applications such as Media Play, Content Library, etc. In this case, to view the contents of the message, switch to TV viewing mode. N When the message of an unknown mobile phone is displayed, select the mobile phone in the Message item of the Home Network Center and select Denied to block the phone. husband SMS New message received Do you want to view the details? OK Cancel 851.86MB/993.02MB Free SUM PHOTO husband Photo SUM Music Movie Setup R Return Device Message View If a new text message (SMS) arrives while you are watching TV, the alarm window appears. If you click the OK button, the contents of the message are displayed. ● If you select the OK button, the contents of the message are displayed. ● If you select the Cancel button, the alarm window appears up to three times at 5 minute intervals. N You can configure the viewing settings for the text message (SMS) contents on the mobile phone. For the procedures, refer to the mobile phone manual. N Some special characters may be displayed as blank or broken characters. husband SMS New message received Do you want to view the details? OK Cancel Call Arrival Alarm If a call arrives while you are watching TV, the alarm window appears. ● If you select the OK button, the call arrival alarm is confirmed and the alarm window is closed. ● If you select the Cancel button, the alarm window appears up to three times at 5 minute intervals. husband Call You have a phone call Mom 011-298-2030 OK Cancel Schedule Alarm While you are watching TV, the alarm window appears to display the registered schedule. ● If you select the OK button, you can view the contents of the schedule registered on the mobile phone. ● If you select the Cancel button, the alarm window appears up to three times at 5 minute intervals. N You can configure the viewing settings for the schedule contents on the mobile phone. For the procedures, refer to the mobile phone manual. N Some special characters may be displayed as blank or broken characters. husband Scheduled event You have a schedule Do you want to view the details? OK Cancel English - 80 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 80 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:54 ¦ Using the Media Function An alarm window appears informing the user that the media contents (videos, photos, music) sent from the mobile phone will be displayed on the TV. The contents are played automatically 3 seconds after the alarm window appears. If you press the RETURN or EXIT button when the alarm window appears, the Media Contents are not played. N To turn off the media contents transmission from the mobile phone, set Media to Off in Setup of the Home Network Center. N The contents may not be played on the TV depending on their resolution and format. Media will be played from “111-1234-5671” Media play control buttons Button Wheel (◄/►) ENTERE RETURN TOOLS INFO EXIT Operations Move the cursor and select an item. While playing a movie file: skip forwards or backwards through the movie file. Pressing the ENTERE button during play pauses the play. Pressing the ENTERE button during pause resumes the play. Return to the previous menu. Run various functions from the Photo, Music and Movie menus. Show file information. Stop Media Play mode and Returns to TV mode. N The ENTERE and ◄/► buttons may not work depending on the type of media content. English - 81 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 81 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:55 RECOMMENDATIONS ¦ Troubleshooting If the TV seems to have a problem, first try this list of possible problems and solutions. If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, visit samsung.com, then click on Support or call Samsung customer service at 1-800-SAMSUNG. Problem Solution Poor picture TV image does not look as good as it did in the store. Picture is distorted: macroblock, small block, dots, pixelization. First of all, please perform the Picture Test to confirm that your TV is properly displaying test image. ● Go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Picture Test If the test image is properly displayed, the poor picture may caused by the source or signal. ● ● If you have an analog Cable/Satellite Box, upgrade to an HD Box Use HDMI or Component cables to deliver HD picture quality. Cable/Satellite subscriber : Try HD(High Definition) stations from channel line up. Air/Cable Antenna connection : Try HD stations after performing Auto program. ● N Many HD channels are upscaled from SD(Standard Definition) contents. Adjust Cable/Sat box video output resolution to 1080i or 720p. ● ● ● Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially on fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. Low signal level can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV problem. Wrong or missing color with Component connection. ● Make sure the Component cables are connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose connections may cause color problems or the screen will be blank. Poor color or brightness. ● Adjust Picture options in the TV menu. (Picture mode, Color, Brightness, Sharpness) Adjust Energy Saving option in Setup menu. Try picture reset to view the default picture setting. (Go to MENU - Picture - Picture Reset) ● ● Dotted line on the edge of screen. ● ● If picture size is set to Screen Fit, change to 16:9. Change cable/satellite box resolution. Picture is black and white with AV (Composite) input only. ● Connect video cable(Yellow) to Green jack of component input 1 of the TV. Picture freezes or is distorted when changing channels or picture is delayed. ● If connected with cable box, please try to reset cable box. (reconnect AC cord and wait until cable box reboots. It may take up to 20 minutes) Set output resolution of cable box to 1080i or 720p. Sound Problem ● First of all, please perform the Sound Test to confirm that your TV audio is properly operating. ● Go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Sound Test If the audio is OK, the sound problem may caused by the source or signal. No sound or sound is too low at maximum volume. ● Please check the volume of device (Cable/Sat Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) connected to your TV. Then, adjust the TV volume accordingly. Picture is good but no sound. ● ● Set the Speaker Select option to TV speaker in the sound menu. Make sure audio cables from an external device are connected to correct audio input jacks on the TV. Check connected device’s audio output option. (ex: You may need to change your cable box’ audio option to HDMI when you have HDMI connected to your TV.) If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required. Remove plug from headphone jack. (if available on your TV) Reboot the connected device by reconnecting the device’s power cable. ● ● ● ● Noise from speaker. ● ● ● Check cable connections. Make sure a video cable is not connected to an audio input. For Antenna/Cable connection, check signal strength. Low signal level may cause sound distortion. Perform the Sound Test as explained above. English - 82 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 82 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:55 Problem Solution No Picture, No Video TV won’t turn on. ● ● ● Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the TV. Make sure the wall outlet is working. Try pressing the POWER button on the TV to make sure the remote is working properly. If the TV turns on, it may be caused by Remote Control. To fix the Remote problem, refer to ‘Remote control does not work’ below. TV turns off automatically. ● ● ● ● Check if the Sleep Timer is set to On in the Setup menu. If connected the TV to your PC, check your PC power settings. Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the TV. If there is no signal for about 10 ~ 15 minutes with Antenna/Cable connection, the TV will turn off. No picture/Video. ● Check cable connections. (remove and reconnect all cables of TV and external devices) Set your external device’s (Cable/Sat Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) video output to match the connections to the TV input. For example, external device’s output : HDMI, TV’s input : HDMI Make sure your connected device is powered on. Make sure to select the TV’s correct source by pressing the SOURCE button on the remote control. Reboot the connected device by reconnecting the device’s power cable. ● ● ● ● RF(Cable/Antenna) Connection Cannot receive all channels. ● Make sure coaxial cable is connected securely. Please try Auto Program to add available channels to the channel list. Go to MENU - Channel - Auto program then select Auto and make sure correct Cable TV signal type is set in the menu. There are 3 options. (STD, HRC and IRC) Verify Antenna is positioned correctly. No Caption on digital channels. ● ● Check Caption Setup menu. Try changing Caption Mode Service 1 to CC1. Some channels may not have caption data. Picture is distorted: macroblock, small block, dots, pixelization. ● ● Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially on fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. Low signal level can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV problem. ‘Not Supported Mode’ message. ● Set your PC’s output resolution so it matches the resolutions supported by the TV. PC is always shown on source list even if not connected. ● This is normal; PC is always shown on the source list even though a PC is not connected. Video is OK but there is no audio with HDMI connection. ● Check the audio output setting on your PC. Wireless network connection failure. ● ● ● Samsung Wireless USB dongle is required to use wireless network. Make sure Network Connection is set to Wireless. TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer (Router). Software Upgrade over the network fails. ● ● Try network test in Setup menu. If you have latest SW version, SW upgrade will not proceed. ● ● PC Connection Network Connection English - 83 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 83 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:55 Problem Solution Others Purple/green rolling horizontal bars and buzzing noise from the TV speakers with Component cable connection. ● Remove the left and right audio connections from the set-top-box. If the buzzing stops, this indicates that the set-top-box has a grounding issue. Replace the Component video cables with an HDMI connection. Picture is not shown in full screen. ● ● Black bars on each side will be shown on HD channels when displaying upscaled SD (4:3) contents. Black bars on Top & Bottom will be shown on movies that have aspect ratios different from your TV. Adjust picture size option on your external device or TV to full screen. Remote control does not work. ● ● ● Replace the remote control batteries with correct polarity (+/–). Clean the transmission window located on the top of the remote. Try pointing the remote directly at the TV from 5~6 feet away. Can not control TV power or volume with Cable/Sat box remote control. ● Program the Cable/Sat remote control to operate the TV. Refer to Cable/Sat user manual for SAMSUNG TV code. ‘Not Supported Mode’ message. ● Check the supported resolution of the TV and adjust the external device’s output resolution accordingly. Refer to resolution settings in this manual. Caption on TV menu is greyed out. ● ● Caption can not be selected in the TV menu when connected via HDMI or Component. Caption must be activated on the external device. Can not turn off the Light Effect on the front bezel (Below SAMSUNG Logo). ● ● Adjust the Light effect option in the setup menu. Options are : Off, In Standby, Watching TV and Always. Light Effect is not available on all models. Plastic smell from TV. ● This smell is normal and will dissipate over time. TV Signal Strength is unavailable in the Self Diagnostic Test menu. ● This function is only available with digital channels with an Antenna (RF/Coax) connection (Air or Cable). TV is tilted to right or left side. ● Remove the stand base from TV and reassemble. Can not assemble stand base. ● Make sure TV is placed on flat surface. If can not remove screws from TV, please use magnetized screw driver. Channel menu is grey out (unavailable). ● Channel menu is only available when TV source is selected (Antenna or Cable). Your settings are lost after 30 minutes or every time TV is turned off. ● If TV is in the Store Demo mode, it will reset audio and picture settings every 30 minutes. Please change from Store Demo mode to Home Use mode in the Plug & Play procedure. Press the SOURCE button to select TV mode, go to MENU → Setup → Plug & Play → ENTERE. Intermittent loss of audio or video. ● ● Check cable connections and reconnect. Can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables. Make sure the cables are flexible enough for long term use. If wall mounting, we recommend using cables with 90 degree connectors. You may see small particles if you look closely at the edge of the bezel surrounding the TV screen. ● This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect. ● N This TFT LED panel uses a panel consisting of sub pixels which require sophisticated technology to produce. However, there may be few bright or dark pixels on the screen. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of the product. English - 84 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 84 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:55 ❑ Input cables (Sold seperately) HDMI HDMI-DVI Component Composite(AV) Coaxial (RF) VGA ¦ Installing the Stand N Preset: Place the Guide Stand and Cover Neck onto the stand and fasten it using the screws. Back Front 1. Attach your LED TV to the stand. N Two or more people should carry the TV. N Make sure to distinguish between the front and back of the stand when attaching it. N To make sure the TV is installed on the stand at a proper level, do not apply excess downward pressure to the upper left or right sides of the TV. 2. Fasten screws at position 1 and then fasten screws at position 2. N Stand the product up and fasten the screws. If you fasten the screws with the LED TV placed down, it may lean to one side. 2 1 ¦ Disconnecting the Stand 1. Remove screws from the back of the TV. 2. Separate the stand from the TV. N Two or more people should carry the TV. 3. Cover the bottom hole with the cover. English - 85 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 85 2009-07-28 �� 11:23:57 ¦ Assembling the Cables ❑ Stand Type N Enclose the cables in the Holder-Wire Cable so that the cables are not visible through the transparent stand. 1 1 2 2 3 3 ❑ Wall-Mount Type 1 1 N Do not pull the cables too hard when arranging them. This may cause damage to the product’s connection terminals. English - 86 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 86 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:02 ¦ Wall Mount kit Specifications (VESA) Install your wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor. When attaching to other building materials, please contact your nearest dealer. If installed on a ceiling or slanted wall, it may fall and result in severe personal injury. N Standard dimensions for wall mount kits are shown in the table above. N When purchasing Samsung’s wall mount kit, a detailed installation manual and all parts necessary for assembly are provided. N Do not use screws longer than the standard dimension, as they may cause damage to the inside of the TV set. N For wall mounts that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications, the length of the screws may differ depending on their specifications. N Do not use screws that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications. N Do not fasten the screws too strongly, this may damage the product or cause the product to fall, leading to personal injury. Samsung is not liable for these kinds of accidents. N Samsung is not liable for product damage or personal injury when a non-VESA or non-specified wall mount is used or the consumer fails to follow the product installation instructions. N Our 57” and 63” models do not comply with VESA Specifications. Therefore, you should use our dedicated wall mount kit for this model. N Do not exceed 15 degrees tilt when mounting this TV. Product Family LED-TV PDP-TV LFD inches VESA Spec. (A * B) 19~22 100 X 100 23~29 200 X 100 30~40 200 X 200 46~55 400 X 400 57~70 800 X 400 80~ 1400 X 800 42~50 400 X 400 58~63 600 X 400 70~ 800 X 400 80~ 1400 X 800 30~39 200 X 200 40~52 400 X 400 55~70 800 X 400 70~ 1400 X 800 Standard Screw Quantity M4 M6 4 M8 M8 4 M6 M8 4 Do not install your Wall Mount Kit while your TV is turned on. It may result in personal injury due to electric shock. English - 87 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 87 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:04 ¦ Preparing before installing the Wall-Mount To install a wall-mount from another manufacturer, use the Holder-Ring 1. 1 ¦ Anti-Theft kensington Lock The Kensington Lock is a device used to physically fix the system when using it in a public place. The appearance and locking method may differ from the illustration depending on the manufacturer. Refer to the manual provided with the Kensington Lock for proper use. N The locking device has to be purchased separately. N The location of the Kensington Lock may be different depending on its model. 1. Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot on the LED TV (1) and turn it in the locking direction (2). 2. Connect the Kensington Lock cable (3). 3 2 1 <Optional> . Fix the Kensington Lock to a desk or a heavy stationary object. ¦ Securing the Installation Space Keep the required distances between the product and other objects (e.g. walls) to ensure proper ventilation. Failing to do so may result in fire or a problem with the product due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product. Install the product so the required distances shown in the figure are kept. N When using a stand or wall-mount, use parts provided by Samsung Electronics only. If you use parts provided by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or an injury due to the product falling. If you use parts provided by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or fire due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product due to poor ventilation. N The appearance may differ depending on the product. When installing the product with a stand When installing the product with a wall-mount 10 cm (.9 inches) 10 cm (.9 inches) 10 cm (.9 inches) 10 cm (.9 inches) 10 cm (.9 inches) 10 cm (.9 inches) 10 cm (.9 inches) English - 88 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 88 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:05 ¦ Securing the TV to a Wall or Cabinet [ Caution: Pulling, pushing, or climbing on the TV may cause the TV to fall. In particular, ensure your children do not hang over or destabilize the TV; doing so may cause the TV to tip over, causing serious injuries or death. Follow all safety precautions provided on the included Safety Flyer. For added stability, install the anti-fall device for safety purposes, as follows. Components: TV-Holder Screw 1 (M8xL19) To prevent the TV from falling: 1. Remove the screw from the top right of the rear cover of the TV. Fasten the TV-Holder to the TV by fastening Screw 1 (for fixing the TV) into the screw hole. N Make sure to only use the supplied screws. cabinet 2. Firmly fasten the screws to the wall or cabinet where the TV is to be installed. Tie the TV-Holder attached to the TV and the screws fastened on the wall or cabinet so that the TV is fixed. N Purchase the screws to be used on the wall or cabinet separately. N Install the TV close to the wall so that it does not fall. N When attaching the TV to the wall, tie the cord level with the ground or slanted downwards for safety purposes. N Confirm that the cord or link does not come loose. N Before moving the TV, separate the connected cord first. cabinet cabinet . Verify all connections are properly secured. Periodically check connections for any sign of fatigue or failure. If you have any doubt about the security of your connections, contact a professional installer. English - 89 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 89 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:06 ¦ Specifications Model Name UN46B8500 Screen Size (Diagonal) 46 inches (46.0 inches measured diagonally) PC Resolution (Optimum) 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz Sound (Output) Dimensions (WxDxH) Body With stand 10W x 2 44.5 x 1.57 x 27.1 (inches) / 1131 x 39.9 x 688 (mm) 44.5 x 10.9 x 29.9 (inches) / 1131 x 277 x 760 (mm) Weight Without Stand With Stand 47.2 lbs / 21.4 Kg 61.3 lbs / 27.8 Kg Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity 50°F to 104°F (10°C to 40°C) 10% to 80%, non-condensing -4°F to 113°F (-20°C to 45°C) 5% to 95%, non-condensing Stand Swivel (Left / Right) -20˚ ~ 20˚ Model Name UN55B8500 Screen Size (Diagonal) 55 inches (54.7 inches measured diagonally) PC Resolution (Optimum) 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz Sound (Output) Dimensions (WxDxH) Body With stand 15W x 2 52.0 x 1.57 x 31.4 (inches) / 1322 x 39.9 x 797 (mm) 52.0 x 12.1 x 34.0 (inches) / 1322 x 307 x 864 (mm) Weight Without Stand With Stand 63.3 lbs / 28.7 Kg 78.5 lbs / 35.6 Kg Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity 50°F to 104°F (10°C to 40°C) 10% to 80%, non-condensing -4°F to 113°F (-20°C to 45°C) 5% to 95%, non-condensing Stand Swivel (Left / Right) -20˚ ~ 20˚ N Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice. N This device is a Class B digital apparatus. N For the power supply and Power Consumption, refer to the label attached to the product. English - 90 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 90 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:06 ¦ Dimensions UN46B8500 TOP VIEW 30.5" 2.9" 3.2" 3.5" 10.3" 11" 1.3" JACK PANEL DETAIL 1.57" 44.5" 40.1" 27.1" 22.6" 29.9" 10.9" 21.7" FRONT VIEW / SIDE VIEW 15.7" (400 mm) 15.7" (400 mm) REAR VIEW NOTE: All drawings are not necessarily to scale. Some dimensions are subject to change without prior notice. Refer to the dimensions prior to performing installation of your TV. Not responsible for typographical or printed errors. © 2009 Samsung Electronics America, Inc English - 91 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 91 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:07 UN55B8500 TOP VIEW 35.7" 2.9" 3.2" 3.6" 10.8" 10.3" 3.0" JACK PANEL DETAIL 1.57" 52.0" 47.6" 31.4" 26.8" 34.0" 12.1" 22.9" FRONT VIEW / SIDE VIEW 15.7" (400 mm) 15.7" (400 mm) REAR VIEW NOTE: All drawings are not necessarily to scale. Some dimensions are subject to change without prior notice. Refer to the dimensions prior to performing installation of your TV. Not responsible for typographical or printed errors. © 2009 Samsung Electronics America, Inc English - 92 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 92 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:07 ● This product uses parts of the software from the Independent JPEG Group. ● This product uses parts of the software owned by the Freetype Project (www.freetype.org). ● This product uses some software programs which are distributed under the GPL/LGPL license. Accordingly, the following GPL and LGPL software source codes that have been used in this product can be provided after asking to vdswmanager@ samsung.com. GPL software: Linux Kernel, Busybox, Binutils LGPL software: Glibc, ffmpeg, smpeg, libgphoto, libusb, SDL ¦ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3, 29 June 2007 Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free, copyright license for software and other kinds of works. The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. For the developers’ and authors’ protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users’ and authors’ sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users’ freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0. Definitions. “This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. “Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. “The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “recipients” may be individuals or organizations. To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work. A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program. To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well. [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 93 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:08 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. Source Code. The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of a work. A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language. The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work’s System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work. The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work. Basic Permissions. All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary. Protecting Users’ Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures. When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work’s users, your or third parties’ legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. Conveying Verbatim Copies. You may convey verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. Conveying Modified Source Versions. You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: – a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date. – b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”. [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 94 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:08 – c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. – d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so. A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate. 6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways: – a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange. – b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. – c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b. – d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. – e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work. A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or nonconsumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product. “Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made. If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network. Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. 7. Additional Terms. “Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions. [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 95 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:08 When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: – a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or – b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or – c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or – d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or – e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or – f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors. All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms. Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way. 8. Termination. You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11). However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. 9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. 10.Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party’s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. 11. Patents. A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor’s “contributor version”. A contributor’s “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 96 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:08 Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor’s essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient’s use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid. If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it. A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. 12.No Surrender of Others’ Freedom. If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. 13.Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. 14.Revised Versions of this License. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program. Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. 15.Disclaimer of Warranty. THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16.Limitation of Liability. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 97 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:08 17.Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee. ¦ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu. org/licenses/>. Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: <program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c’ for details. The hypothetical commands `show w’ and `show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program’s commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read <http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/ why-not-lgpl.html>. [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 98 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:08 ¦ GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL) Version 3, 29 June 2007 Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free, copyright license for software and other kinds of works. The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. For the developers’ and authors’ protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users’ and authors’ sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions. Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users’ freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0. Definitions. “This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. “Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks. “The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “recipients” may be individuals or organizations. To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work. A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program. To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well. To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 99 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:08 1. Source Code. The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of a work. A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language. The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work’s System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work. The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source. The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work. 2. Basic Permissions. All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary. 3. Protecting Users’ Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures. When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work’s users, your or third parties’ legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures. 4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. You may convey verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. 5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: – a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date. – b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”. – c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. – d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so. [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 100 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:08 A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate. 6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways: – a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange. – b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. – c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b. – d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. – e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work. A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or nonconsumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product. “Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made. If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM). The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network. Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. 7. Additional Terms. “Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions. When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 101 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:08 – a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or – b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or – c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or – d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or – e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or – f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors. All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms. Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way. 8. Termination. You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11). However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation. Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice. Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10. 9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. 10.Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party’s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. 11. Patents. A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor’s “contributor version”. A contributor’s “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License. Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor’s essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version. In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party. [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 102 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:08 If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient’s use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid. If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it. A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. 12.No Surrender of Others’ Freedom. If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. 13.Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such. 14.Revised Versions of this License. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program. Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. 15.Disclaimer of Warranty. THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16.Limitation of Liability. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 17.Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee. [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 103 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:08 ¦ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu. org/licenses/>. Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: <program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c’ for details. The hypothetical commands `show w’ and `show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program’s commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read <http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/ why-not-lgpl.html>. [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 104 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:08 ¦ LICENSE ISSUES The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact [email protected]. OpenSSL License Copyright (c) 1998-2007 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)” 4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected]. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)” THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS’’ AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]). Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@ cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-). 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])” THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS’’ AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.] [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 105 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:08 This page is intentionally left blank. [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Eng.indb 106 2009-07-28 �� 11:24:08 ❑ Información importante sobre la garantía relativa al formato de visualización del televisor N Para obtener más información sobre los términos de la garantía, consulte la tarjeta de garantía. Las pantallas LED con formato de pantalla panorámica (16:9, la relación de aspecto ancho: alto de la pantalla) están diseñadas principalmente para visualizar vídeos de movimiento de formato panorámico. Las imágenes deben estar principalmente en el formato panorámico de relación 16:9, o ampliadas para llenar la pantalla si el modelo tiene esta opción, y las imágenes están en movimiento constante. La visualización de imágenes y gráficos estáticos en la pantalla, como las barras oscuras laterales en programación y vídeos de televisión en formato estándar no ampliados, debe limitarse a no más del 5% del tiempo total de visualización del televisor por semana. Además, la visualización de otras imágenes estáticas y texto, como los informes de bolsa, pantallas de videojuegos, logotipos de emisoras, sitios Web o gráficos y dibujos de ordenador, deberá limitarse en todos los televisores como ya se ha descrito. La visualización de imágenes estáticas que supere los límites de las instrucciones anteriores puede producir un envejecimiento desigual de las pantallas LED, lo que provocará una reproducción superpuesta sutil pero permanente de la imagen de la LED. Para evitarlo, varíe la programación y las imágenes y, sobre todo, visualice imágenes en movimiento a toda pantalla, no gráficos estáticos ni barras oscuras. En modelos de LED que ofrezcan opciones para el tamaño de la imagen, utilice estos controles para ver los distintos formatos como imagen a toda pantalla. Tenga cuidado en la selección y duración de los formatos de televisión utilizados para la visualización. La garantía limitada de Samsung no cubre el envejecimiento desigual de la LED como resultado de la selección y uso de formatos, así como otras imágenes retenidas. ● DOCUMENTO DE GARANTÍA LIMITADA PARA NORTEAMÉRICA DE SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS De acuerdo con los requisitos, condiciones, exclusiones y limitaciones de la Garantía limitada original suministrada con los productos de Samsung Electronics (SAMSUNG), así como los requisitos, condiciones, exclusiones y limitaciones incluidos en el presente documento, SAMSUNG proporcionará adicionalmente un servicio de reparación de garantía en EE.UU. para los productos de SAMSUNG adquiridos en Canadá, y en Canadá respecto a los productos de SAMSUNG adquiridos en EE.UU., para el período de garantía especificado originalmente, y sólo para el comprador original. Las reparaciones en garantía descritas anteriormente deben realizarse en centros de servicio técnico autorizados de SAMSUNG. Junto con este documento, se debe presentar un documento de garantía limitada original y una factura con fecha como prueba de compra en el centro de servicio técnico. El transporte a y desde el centro de servicio técnico es responsabilidad del comprador. Las condiciones cubiertas se limitan solamente a defectos de fabricación en material y mano de obra, y sólo los que se hayan producido con un uso normal del producto. Excluidas, pero no limitadas a ellas, se encuentran las disposiciones originales especificadas para los servicios a domicilio o en las instalaciones de la empresa, tiempos máximos y mínimos de reparación, cambios o sustituciones, accesorios, opciones, actualizaciones o consumibles. Para conocer la ubicación de un centro de servicio técnico autorizado de SAMSUNG, llame al número gratuito indicado: N En EE.UU.: 1-800-SAMSUNG (1-800-726-7864) N En Canadá: 1-800-SAMSUNG ❑ Precauciones al mostrar en la pantalla una imagen fija La imagen fija puede causar daños permanentes en la pantalla del televisor. ● No deje una imagen fija en la pantalla LED durante más de dos horas ya que se podría producir una retención de la imagen en la pantalla. Este fenómeno de retención de imágenes también se denomina quemadura de pantalla. Para evitar que se produzca esa persistencia de la imagen, reduzca el nivel de brillo y de contraste de la pantalla cuando muestre imágenes fijas. ● El uso del televisor LED en formato 4:3 durante un tiempo prolongado puede dejar rastros de bordes en las partes izquierda, derecha y central de la pantalla debido a las diferencias en la emisión lumínica de la pantalla. Reproducir un DVD o una videoconsola puede causar un efecto similar en la pantalla. La garantía no cubre estos daños. ● Ver imágenes fijas de videojuegos y PC durante más tiempo del indicado puede producir imágenes fantasma parciales. Para evitar este efecto, reduzca el ‘brillo’ y el ‘contraste’ cuando vea imágenes fijas. © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Reservados todos los derechos. [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 1 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:41 Contenido Configuración del televisor ■ Listado de características................................................................... 2 ■ Accesorios.......................................................................................... 2 ■ Aspecto general del panel de control................................................. 3 ■ Aspecto general del mando a distancia.............................................. 4 ■ Emparejamiento del mando a distancia............................................. 5 ■ Búsqueda del mando a distancia....................................................... 5 ■ Minimando a distancia........................................................................ 6 ■ Instalación de las pilas en el mando a distancia................................ 6 ■ Visualización de menús...................................................................... 7 ■ Cómo poner el televisor en modo de espera...................................... 8 ■ Función Plug & Play........................................................................... 8 CANAL ■ Menú del canal................................................................................. 14 ■ Gestión de los canales..................................................................... 15 IMAGEN ■ Configuración del menú de imagen.................................................. 17 ■ Visualización PIP (Imagen en imagen)............................................. 21 ■ Uso del televisor como una pantalla de ordenador (PC).................. 22 ■ Ajuste del televisor con el ordenador............................................... 23 SONIDO ■ Configuración del menú de sonido................................................... 24 CONFIGURACIÓN ■ Configuración del menú de configuración........................................ 26 ■ Configuración de la hora.................................................................. 29 ■ Conexión de la red........................................................................... 31 ■ Configuración de la red.................................................................... 34 ENTRADA / AYUDA ■ Menú de entrada.............................................................................. 37 ■ Menú de ayuda................................................................................. 37 MEDIA PLAY (USB & DLNA) ■ Configuración de la red DLNA.......................................................... 57 ■ Instalación de la aplicación DLNA.................................................... 58 ■ Uso de la aplicación DLNA............................................................... 59 ■ Uso de la función DLNA................................................................... 61 ANYNET+ ■ Conexión de dispositivos Anynet+ . ................................................. 62 ■ Configuración de Anynet+................................................................ 63 ■ Conmutación entre dispositivos Anynet+ ........................................ 63 ■ Grabación......................................................................................... 64 ■ Escucha a través de un receptor (sistema Cine en casa)................ 64 ■ Solución de problemas de Anynet+. ................................................ 65 Español Conexiones ■ Conexión de las antenas de VHF y UHF............................................ 9 ■ Conexión de TV por cable................................................................ 10 ■ Aspecto general del panel de conexiones.........................................11 ■ Menú de opciones de la lista de películas........................................ 52 ■ Reproducción de un archivo de película.......................................... 52 ■ Menús de opciones de la reproducción de películas........................ 55 ■ Uso del menú de configuración........................................................ 56 Content Library ■ Uso de la biblioteca de contenidos................................................... 66 ■ Uso del contenido de la memoria del TV.......................................... 67 ■ Uso del gestor de contenido............................................................. 68 Internet@TV ■ Primeros pasos con Internet@TV.................................................... 69 ■ Edición del extracto en el acoplamiento........................................... 72 ■ Uso del widget de un perfil............................................................... 72 ■ Uso de la galería de widgets de Yahoo!®........................................ 74 ■ Uso del servicio meteorológico de Yahoo!®..................................... 75 ■ Using the Yahoo!® News Widget...................................................... 75 ■ Uso del servicio Flickr de Yahoo!®................................................... 76 ■ Uso del servicio de finanzas de Yahoo!®......................................... 77 ■ Solución de problemas de Internet@TV........................................... 77 ■ Página web de la ayuda................................................................... 77 Centro de red doméstica ■ Centro de red doméstica.................................................................. 78 ■ Configuración del Centro de red doméstica..................................... 79 ■ Uso de la función de mensajería...................................................... 80 ■ Uso de la función multimedia........................................................... 81 RECOMENDACIONES Media Play (USB & DLNA) ■ Conexión de un dispositivo USB...................................................... 40 ■ Funciones del reproductor multimedia............................................. 41 ■ Clasificación de la lista de fotos....................................................... 43 ■ Menú de opciones de la lista de fotos.............................................. 44 ■ Visualización de una foto o una presentación.................................. 45 ■ Menú de opciones de la presentación de diapositivas..................... 46 ■ Clasificación de la lista de música.................................................... 48 ■ Menú de opciones de la lista de música........................................... 49 ■ Reproducción de música.................................................................. 50 ■ Menú de opciones de la reproducción de música............................ 51 ■ Clasificación de la lista de películas................................................. 51 ■ Solución de problemas..................................................................... 82 ■ Instalación del soporte...................................................................... 85 ■ Desconexión del soporte.................................................................. 85 ■ Montaje de los cables....................................................................... 86 ■ Especificaciones del equipo de montaje en la pared (VESA).......... 87 ■ Preparación para instalar el montaje mural...................................... 88 ■ Bloqueo antirrobo Kensington.......................................................... 88 ■ Seguridad en el espacio de instalación............................................ 88 ■ Fijación del televisor a una pared o un armario................................ 89 ■ Especificaciones............................................................................... 90 ■ Dimensiones..................................................................................... 91 ❑ Licencia TruSurround HD, SRS y el símbolo son marcas comerciales de SRS Labs, Inc. La tecnología TruSurround HD está incorporada bajo licencia de SRS Labs, Inc. Fabricado bajo licencia de Dolby Laboratories. Dolby y el símbolo de la doble D son marcas comerciales de Dolby Laboratories. DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content. ❑ Símbolo Pulsar N O T Nota Botón de una pulsación Botón TOOLS Español - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 1 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:41 Configuración del televisor Para usar el televisor, en primer lugar debe configurarlo para que se adapte a su entorno. N Las ilustraciones de este manual se proporcionan sólo como referencia y pueden ser diferentes del producto real. El diseño y las especificaciones del producto se pueden cambiar sin previo aviso para mejorar el rendimiento del producto. ¦ Listado de características ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Valores ajustables de la imagen que se pueden almacenar en la memoria del televisor. Temporizador automático para encender o apagar el televisor. Temporizador de desconexión especial. Excelente interfaz digital y capacidad de trabajo en red: El sintonizador digital HD incorporado permite ver las emisiones HD que no exigen una suscripción sin que sea necesario disponer de un receptor de televisión por cable/satélite (decodificador). Conexión HDMI/DVI del PC con este televisor. Calidad excelente de la imagen SRS TruSurround HD proporciona un sistema surround virtual. Media Play: Permite reproducir archivos de música, imágenes y películas guardados en un dispositivo USB o DLNA. Internet@TV: Se pueden utilizar diferentes servicios de Internet para ver información útil y contenidos de entretenimiento. Centro de red doméstica: Permite configurar un servidor de mensajes móvil o un convertidor multimedia DLNA. ¦ Accesorios Mando a distancia (BN59-00849A) y pilas (2 x AAA) Minimando a distancia y batería de litio (3V) (BN59-00802A) Cubierta inferior (BN63-05654A) Tarjeta de garantía / Guía de seguridad Soporte de cables (BN61-05491A) CD del programa (BN59-00726D) Soporte del televisor y tornillo (X1) (BN96-10788B) Paño de limpieza (BN63-01798B) Soporte de cables (BN61-05596A) Anillo de soporte (4 unid.) (BN61-05280A) Soporte de cables (3 unid.) (BN61-05373A) Manual de instrucciones / Guía rápida de confi guración (M8xL19) N Asegúrese de que los siguientes elementos se incluyen con el televisor de pantalla LED. Si falta alguno, póngase en contacto con su distribuidor. N El color y la forma de los componentes pueden variar según el modelo. Español - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 2 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:43 ¦ Aspecto general del panel de control N El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo. N Los botones del panel frontal se pueden activar al tacto. 1 2 7 7 6 5 4 3 1 SENSOR DEL MANDO A DISTANCIA: El mando a distancia debe dirigirse hacia este punto del televisor. 2 P (ENCENDIDO): Púlselo para encender o apagar el TV. 3 z: Permiten cambiar de canal. En el menú de la pantalla, utilice los botones z del mismo modo que los botones ▼ y ▲ del mando a distancia. 4 y: Púlselos para subir o bajar el volumen. En el menú de la pantalla, utilice los botones y del mismo modo que los botones ◄ y ► del mando a distancia. 5 MENU: Púlselo para ver un menú en pantalla con las opciones del televisor. 6 SOURCE E: Cambia entre todas las fuentes de entrada disponibles. En el menú de la pantalla, utilice este botón del mismo modo que el botón ENTERE del mando a distancia. 7 ALTAVOCES Español - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 3 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:44 ¦ Aspecto general del mando a distancia N El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo. 1 POWER: Enciende o apaga el TV. 2 TV: Selecciona directamente el modo TV. 3 BOTONES NUMÉRICOS: Permiten cambiar de canal. 4 _: Pulse este botón para seleccionar canales adicionales (digitales) emitidos por la misma emisora. Por ejemplo, para seleccionar el canal ‘54-3’, pulse ‘54’, ‘_’ y ‘3’. 5 CH LIST: Muestra las listas de canales en la pantalla. 6 TOOLS: Se usa para seleccionar rápidamente las funciones que se usan con mayor frecuencia. 7 INTERNET@: Pulse para utilizar diferentes servicios de Internet con el fin de ver información útil y contenidos de entretenimiento. 8 BOTONES DE COLORES: Utilice estos botones en los menús Lista de canales, Internet@TV, Media Play, etc. 9 SOURCE: Púlselo para mostrar y seleccionar las fuentes de vídeo disponibles. 0 y: Púlselos para subir o bajar el volumen. ! CONTENT: Esta función permite ver la Content Library. @ MEDIA.P: Permite reproducir archivos de música, fotos y películas. # INFO: Púlselo para mostrar información en la pantalla del televisor. $ Use estos botones en los modos Media Play y Anynet+. (∏: Este mando a distancia se puede usar para controlar la grabación en las grabadoras de Samsung con la función Anynet+) % SENSOR: Detecta el brillo ambiental y determina si se ha de encender, o no, la luz de fondo de los botones del mando a distancia. La luz de fondo permite encontrar más fácilmente los botones del mando a distancia en una habitación a oscuras. ^ PRE-CH : Permite volver al canal que se ha estado viendo anteriormente. & MENU : Muestra el menú de pantalla principal. * FAV.CH : Permite Cambiar a Aire los Canales Favoritos % 1 2 3 4 5 ^ & * 6 ( ( RETURN : Vuelve al menú anterior ) RUEDA (ARRIBA▲ / ABAJO▼ / IZQUIERDA◄ / DERECHA►) / ENTERE: Pulse las secciones arriba/abajo/izquierda/derecha del botón de rueda y Enter para seleccionar los elementos del menú en pantalla y cambiar los valores del menú. Con el botón de rueda puede desplazarse arriba y abajo del menú, cambiar canales y ajustar el volumen. a EXIT : Púlselo para salir del menú. b z: Permiten cambiar de canal. ) 7 a 8 9 0 b ! @ c d e f # $ RF g c MUTE M : Pulse para desactivar momentáneamente el sonido. d P.SIZE: Seleccion del tamaño de la imagen. e MTS: Pulse para elegir programas mono, estéreo o de audio independiente (emisión SAP). f CC: Controla el decodificador de subtítulos. g PAIRING / RESET: Se utiliza para emparejar el televisor y el mando a distancia. (consulte la página 5) N Este dispositivo cumple con la Parte 15 de las Normas FCC. (1) Este dispositivo no puede causar interferencias peligrosas, y (2) Este dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia recibida, incluida la interferencia que pueda causar una operación no deseada. Nombre del fabricante : SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO,.LTD. Nombre del modelo: Controlador a distancia IC : 649E-SWPZ01TX Nombre del fabricante : SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO,.LTD. Nombre del modelo: Transceptor RF IC : 649E-SWPZ01RX Español - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 4 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:45 ¦ Emparejamiento del mando a distancia Un proceso que habilita la intercomunicación entre el televisor y el mando a distancia. Así se habilita que el mando a distancia controle sólo este televisor. ❑ Emparejamiento automático Un método que completa el emparejamiento entre el televisor y el mando a distancia. N Si el emparejamiento automático no funciona, consulte ‘Emparejamiento manual’. ■ Cuando el televisor está apagado (modo en espera) 1. Pulse el botón POWER(P) del mando a distancia. N El mando a distancia entra en el modo de emparejamiento. 2. El televisor que recibe la orden de encender se enciende. N El televisor entra en el modo de emparejamiento. El modo de emparejamiento se mantiene hasta que se completa el emparejamiento. RF 3. Se completa el modo de emparejamiento. N El mando a distancia pita. ■ RF Cuando el televisor está encendido 1. Pulse cualquier botón del mando a distancia. N El mando a distancia entra en el modo de emparejamiento. N Una vez completado el emparejamiento, el botón pulsado por el usuario transmite la orden al televisor. N El tiempo empleado para completar el emparejamiento y enviar la orden es menos de 1 segundo. 2. Se completa el modo de emparejamiento. N El mando a distancia pita. RF RF ❑ Emparejamiento manual Se puede emparejar el televisor y el mando a distancia para que sólo el mando a distancia controle el televisor. RF 1. Enchufe el cable del televisor en una toma de corriente. N Apague el televisor. 2. Pulse el botón PAIRING del mando a distancia. N Utilice un objeto afilado para pulsar el botón. N Mantenga una distancia de menos de 3 pies (1 m) entre el televisor y el mando a distancia. RF 3. Pulse el botón POWER(P) del panel frontal del televisor. El televisor se enciende y se completa el emparejamiento con el mando a distancia. 4. Pulse los botones del mando a distancia para comprobar si éste se ha emparejado correctamente. N Si no funciona, vuelva a repetir el proceso. N Si el mando a distancia continúa sin funcionar, pulse el botón RESET y reemplace las pilas. ¦ Búsqueda del mando a distancia RF 1. Mantenga pulsado el botón Volume (-) del panel frontal del televisor durante 10 segundos. El televisor transmitirá una señal para buscar el mando a distancia. 2. El mando a distancia generará una alarma de sonido durante 30 segundos. Busca el mando a distancia en la ubicación donde el sonido es más fuerte. N Si no oye ningún sonido, vuelva a intentarlo. 3. Si se encuentra el mando a distancia, pulse cualquier botón del mando a distancia para apagar el sonido. Español - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 5 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:45 ¦ Minimando a distancia El minimando a distancia es un mando a distancia simplificado que sólo tiene los botones de encendido y del control de los canales y del volumen. 1 1 Botón de encendido/apagado 2 2 < : Canal siguiente / > : Canal anterior 3 3 + : Subir volumen / – : Bajar volumen 2 4 3 4 Transmisor IrDA N Cuando utilice el minimando encare esta parte al televisor. N El color y la forma de los componentes pueden variar según el modelo. N SÓLO CALIFORNIA (ESTADOS UNIDOS) Esta advertencia sobre el perclorato se aplica sólo para las pilas de botón de litio CR (dióxido de manganeso) en los productos que se venden o distribuyen SÓLO en California (EE.UU.). ‘Material perclorato: manejar con especial cuidado. Consultar www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate:’ ¦ Instalación de las pilas en el mando a distancia Mando a distancia normal 1. Levante la tapa de la parte posterior del mando a distancia, como se muestra en la ilustración. 2. Coloque dos pilas de tamaño AAA. N Respete los extremos ‘+’ y ‘–’ de las pilas que se indican en el diagrama del interior del compartimiento. 3. Vuelva a poner la tapa. N Saque las pilas y guárdelas en un lugar fresco y seco si no va a utilizar el mando a distancia durante un período de tiempo prolongado. (Con un uso normal del TV, las pilas duran alrededor de un año.) Minimando a distancia 1. Gire hacia la izquierda la tapa de la pila para desbloquearla y ábrala. 2. Inserte una pila de litio 3V. OPEN 3. Coloque la tapa de la pila en el minimando alineada con las ranuras y gírela hacia la derecha para bloquearla. CLOSE N Si el mando a distancia no funciona, haga estas comprobaciones: ¿Está encendido el TV? ¿Están intercambiados los polos positivos y negativos de las pilas? ¿Se han agotado las pilas? ¿Ha habido un corte de luz o el cable está desenchufado? ¿Hay un fluorescente o un neón a poca distancia? Español - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 6 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:46 ¦ Visualización de menús Antes de usar el televisor, siga los pasos siguientes para conocer cómo explorar el menú, con el fin de seleccionar y ajustar diversas funciones. Botón MENU Mostrar el menú de pantalla principal. Botón RETURN Volver al menú anterior. Botón ENTERE / RUEDA Mover el cursor y seleccionar una opción. Seleccionar la opción marcada. Confirmar la configuración. EXIT Salir del menú de pantalla principal. ❑ Funcionamiento de la visualización en pantalla El paso de acceso puede variar según el menú seleccionado. 1. Pulse el botón MENU. Imagen 2. Se muestra el menú principal en la pantalla. El lado izquierdo del menú tiene iconos: Imagen, Sonido, Canal, Configuración, Entrada, Aplicaciones, Soporte técnico. RF Modo : Normal Luz de fondo Contraste Brillo Definición Color Tinte (V/R) Configuración avanzada :5 : 95 : 45 : 50 : 50 : V50/R50 Modo : Normal ▶ 3. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar uno de los iconos. N Para ir a un menú inferior, gire la rueda hacia la derecha cuando se muestre el menú. Para ir a un menú superior, gire la rueda hacia la izquierda. 5. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar el submenú del icono. 6. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para aumentar o reducir el valor de un elemento en concreto. La visualización en pantalla de ajuste puede variar según el menú seleccionado. Imagen 4. Pulse el botón ENTERE para acceder al submenú del icono. RF Luz de fondo : 5 Contraste Brillo Definición Color Tinte (V/R) Configuración avanzada Opciones de imagen : 95 : 45 : 50 : 50 : V50/R50 ▲ Luz de fondo ▼ ▶ RF 5 U Mover L Ajustar E Ingresar R Regresar Icono de ayuda 7. Pulse el botón ENTERE para completar la configuración. Pulse el botón EXIT para salir. Español - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 7 RF 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:46 ¦ Cómo poner el televisor en modo de espera El aparato puede ponerse en modo de espera para reducir el consumo eléctrico. El modo de espera es muy útil si desea interrumpir la visualización momentáneamente (durante la comida, por ejemplo). 1. Pulse el botón POWERP del mando a distancia. N La pantalla se apaga y aparece un indicador de modo de espera en el equipo. 2. Para volver a encenderlo, sólo tiene que volver a pulsar el botón POWERP. N No deje el aparato en modo de espera durante períodos largos de tiempo (cuando está de vacaciones, por ejemplo). Lo mejor es desenchufar el aparato de la toma de corriente CA y de la antena. ¦ Función Plug & Play Cuando el televisor se enciende por primera vez, los valores se inician correlativamente de forma automática. 1. Pulse el botón POWERP del mando a distancia. N También puede usar el botón POWERP del televisor. N Aparece el mensaje de inicio de Plug & Play. Pulse el botón ENTERE. N Si el control remoto no funciona bien, siga instrucciones para repetir el proceso de emparejamiento entre control y TV. Plug & Play 2. Pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar el idioma y, a Menu Language, Store Demo, Channels, and Time will be set. If the remote control is not functioning continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Se muestra el mensaje Seleccione ‘Uso properly, please follow the instructions to repeat the domiciliario’ para instalar este TV en su casa. process for pairing the remote control to the TV. 3. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar Demo comercio o Uso domiciliario y, a Start continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Se muestra el mensaje Seleccione la fuente de E Enter antena a memorizar. N Es recomendable configurar el televisor en el modo Uso domiciliario para obtener la mejor imagen en un entorno doméstico. N Demo comercio sólo es necesario en los entornos comerciales. N Si la unidad accidentalmente se configura en el modo Demo comercio y se desea volver a Uso domiciliario (Normal): Pulse el botón del volumen del televisor. Cuando se muestra la OSD del volumen, mantenga pulsado el botón MENU del televisor durante 5 segundos. 4. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para memorizar los canales de la conexión seleccionada. Pulse el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Selección. N Aire: Señal de antena aérea. / Cable: Señal de antena del cable. / Auto: Señales de antena aérea y de cable. N En el modo de cable, puede seleccionar el origen de señal correcto entre STD, HRC, e IRC con los botones ▲, ▼, ◄ o ► y, a continuación, pulsando el botón ENTERE. Si tiene cable digital, seleccione la fuente de la señal del sistema de cable para analógica y para digital. Póngase en contacto con su proveedor de cable para averiguar el tipo de sistema de cable existente en su zona. 5. Pulse el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Iniciar. El televisor empezará a memorizar todos los canales disponibles. N Para detener la búsqueda antes de que termine, pulse el botón ENTERE con la opción Detener seleccionada. N Una vez guardados todos los canales disponibles, se inicia la eliminación de los canales codificados. Vuelve a mostrarse el menú de programación automática. Pulse el botón ENTERE cuando se complete la memorización de canales. Aparece automáticamente el mensaje Configure el modo de Reloj. 6. Pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Auto y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. RF Se muestra el mensaje Configurar la hora de verano. Si Selección Manual, Configurar fecha y hora actuales. 7. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Apagado, Encendido o Auto y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 8. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para resaltar la zona horaria de su región. Pulse el botón ENTERE. Si ha recibido una señal digital, se ajustará la hora automáticamente. Si no es así, consulte las instrucciones de ‘Configuración de la hora’ para configurar el reloj. (consulte la páginas 29~30) 9. Se muestra la descripción del método de conexión para conseguir la mejor calidad de la pantalla HD. Compruebe la descripción y pulse el botón ENTERE. 10.Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar Ver Guía producto o Ver TV. Pulse el botón ENTERE. Ver Guía producto: Lleva a Guía del producto, donde se puede ver la explicación de las funciones principales del nuevo televisor de alta definición. Ver TV: Puede ver los canales memorizados. Si desea reiniciar esta función. 2. Pulse de nuevo el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Plug & Play. N La función Plug & Play está disponible sólo en el modo TV. Configuración 1. Pulse el botón MENU para ver el menú en pantalla. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Configuración y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Plug & Play Idioma Tiempo Modo Juego BD Wise Tipo de red Configuración de red V-Chip : Español ▶ : Apagado : Encendido : Cable Español - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 8 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:46 Conexiones ¦ Conexión de las antenas de VHF y UHF Si la antena tiene un conjunto de cables como el que se muestra en el diagrama de la derecha, consulte ‘Antenas de par de cables planos de 300 Ω’ a continuación. Si la antena tiene un cable como el que se muestra en el diagrama de la derecha, consulte ‘Antenas con cables coaxiales de 75 Ω’. Si dispone de dos antenas, consulte ‘Antenas de VHF y UHF independientes’. Antenas de par de cables planos de 300 Ω Si utiliza una antena externa (de azotea o de ‘cuernos’) de par de cables planos de 300 Ω, siga las indicaciones siguientes. 1. Coloque los conductores del par de cables bajo los tornillos del adaptador de 300-75 Ω (no incluido). Utilice un destornillador para apretar los tornillos. ANT IN 2. Conecte el adaptador en el terminal ANT IN en la parte posterior del televisor. Antenas de cable coaxial de 75 Ω Conecte el cable de la antena en el terminal ANT IN de la parte posterior del televisor. ANT IN Antenas de VHF y UHF independientes Si dispone de dos antenas independientes para el televisor (una de VHF y otra de UHF), deberá combinar las señales de ambas antenas antes de conectarlas al televisor. Este procedimiento precisa un adaptador-combinador especial (disponible en la mayoría de tiendas de electrónica). 1. Conecte ambos cables de antena al combinador. 2. Conecte el combinador en el terminal ANT IN de la parte inferior del panel posterior. UHF VHF UHF VHF ANT IN Español - [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 9 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:47 ¦ Conexión de TV por cable Para conectar a un sistema de TV por cable, siga estas instrucciones. ANT IN TV por cable sin decodificador Conecte el cable de entrada en el terminal ANT IN de la parte posterior del televisor. N Dado que el TV está preparado para la televisión por cable, no se necesita un decodificador para ver canales de cable no codificados. Conexión al decodificador que decodifica todos los canales 1. Busque el cable conectado al terminal ANT OUT del decodificador. N Este terminal puede estar indicado como ‘ANT OUT’, ‘VHF OUT’ o ‘OUT’. ANT IN ANT OUT ANT IN 2. Conecte el otro extremo del cable en el terminal ANT IN de la parte posterior del TV. Conexión al decodificador de cable que decodifica algunos canales Si su decodificador de cable decodifica únicamente algunos canales (como, por ejemplo, canales de suscripción), siga las instrucciones que se incluyen a continuación. Necesitará un divisor de dos vías, un conmutador de RF (A/B) y cuatro largos de cable RF. (Estos artículos están disponibles en la mayoría de las tiendas de electrónica.) ANT IN Cable de entrada Parte posterior del Separador Conmutador RF (A/B) televisor Decodificador de cable 1. Busque y desconecte el cable que está conectado al terminal ANT IN del decodificador. N Este terminal puede estar indicado como ‘ANT IN’, ‘VHF IN’ o ‘IN’. 2. Conecte este cable al divisor de dos vías. 3. Conecte el cable RF entre el terminal OUTPUT del divisor y el terminal IN del decodificador. 4. Conecte el cable RF entre el terminal ANT OUT del decodificador y el terminal B–IN del conmutador RF(A/B). 5. Conecte otro cable entre el otro terminal OUT del divisor y el terminal A–IN del conmutador RF (A/B). 6. Conecte el último cable RF entre el terminal OUT del conmutador RF (A/B) y el terminal ANT IN en la parte posterior del televisor. Una vez hecha esta conexión, coloque el conmutador A/B en la posición ‘A’ para la visualización normal. Coloque el conmutador A/B en la posición ‘B’ para ver los canales codificados. (Cuando sitúe el conmutador A/B en ‘B’, deberá sintonizar el TV al canal de salida del decodificador, que normalmente es el canal 3 o 4.) Español - 10 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 10 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:47 ¦ Aspecto general del panel de conexiones N El color y la forma del producto pueden variar según el modelo. Panel posterior 1 4 o 2 3 o Red de televisión por cable N Para conseguir la mejor conexión por cable con este producto, utilice un cable con el grosor máximo que se explica a continuación. ● ● Modèles de moins de 40 po : 12 mm (0,47 po) max. Modèles de 40 po et plus : 14 mm (0,55 po) max. 1 ENTRADA ALIMENTACIÓN Conecta el cable de alimentación suministrado. N La ubicación de la entrada de alimentación puede variar según los modelos. 2 LAN Conecte un cable LAN a este puerto para conectarse a la red. 3 ANT IN Permite conectar a una antena o un sistema de TV por cable. 4 HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3, 4 / PC/DVI AUDIO IN Permite conectar al terminal HDMI un dispositivo que tenga salida HDMI. N No se necesita ninguna conexión de sonido para una conexión de HDMI a HDMI. N ¿Qué es HDMI? HDMI, o interfaz multimedia de alta definición, es una interfaz que permite la transmisión de señales digitales de audio y de vídeo mediante un solo cable. La diferencia entre los dispositivos HDMI y DVI es que el HDMI es más pequeño y tiene instalada la función de codificación HDCP (protección alta de la copia digital del ancho de banda). N Puede que el televisor no proporcione salida de sonido y muestre imágenes con colores anómalos si hay conectados reproductores de DVD / Blu-ray, o bien receptores de cable / satélite (decodificadores) que admiten versiones de HDMI anteriores a la versión 1.3. Si se conecta un cable antiguo HDMI y no hay sonido, conecte el cable HDMI al terminal HDMI IN 1(DVI) y los cables de audio a los terminales PC/DVI AUDIO IN de la parte posterior del televisor. Si sucede esto, póngase en contacto con la empresa suministradora del reproductor de DVD / Blu-ray / receptor de satélite / cable (decodificador) para confirmar la versión HDMI y solicitar una actualización. N Los cables HDMI que no son 1.3 pueden causar un molesto parpadeo o que no se muestre la pantalla N Use el terminal HDMI IN 1(DVI) para conectar el DVI a un dispositivo externo. Use un cable de DVI a HDMI o un adaptador de DVI-HDMI (DVI a HDMI) para la conexión del vídeo y los terminales PC/DVI AUDIO IN para el audio. Cuando se usa una conexión de cable HDMI/DVI, se debe conectar en el terminal HDMI IN 1(DVI). N Cuando se realiza una conexión vía DVI, se debe establecer una conexión de audio independiente. Utilice un cable estéreo miniclavija 2 RCA de 3,5mm. Español - 11 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 11 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:48 5 7 8 R W R W R B G 6 o G 5 BLOQUEO KENSINGTON El bloqueo Kensington es un dispositivo que se usa para fijar físicamente el sistema cuando se usa en un lugar público. Si desea usar un dispositivo de bloqueo, póngase en contacto con el distribuidor donde adquirió el televisor. N La ubicación del bloqueo Kensington puede variar según los modelos. 6 COMPONENT IN / AV IN Permite conectar el vídeo/audio de componentes. El terminal COMPONENT IN también se usa como terminal AV IN. N En la conexión, el color del conector y el terminal debe coincidir. N Conecte el cable de vídeo al terminal COMPONENT IN [Y/VIDEO] y el cable de audio a los terminales COMPONENT IN [R-AUDIO-L]. N Si tiene un reproductor de vídeo ‘mono’ (sin estéreo), use un conector Y (no suministrado) para conectar las terminales de entrada de audio izquierdo o derecho del TV. También se puede conectar el cable al terminal ‘R’. Si el vídeo es estéreo, tendrá que conectar dos cables. N Al conectarse a AV IN, el color del terminal AV IN [Y/VIDEO] (verde) no coincide con el color del cable de vídeo (amarillo). 7 PC/DVI AUDIO IN Permite conectar al terminal de salida de audio de su PC. Entradas de audio DVI desde dispositivos externos. 8 PC IN Permite conectar a las tomas de salida de audio y de vídeo de su PC. N Si el ordenador admite una conexión HDMI, se puede conectar ésta al terminal HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3 o 4. N Si el ordenador admite una conexión DVI, se puede conectar ésta al terminal HDMI IN 1(DVI) / PC/DVI AUDIO. Español - 12 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 12 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:48 9 0 W R ! 0 @ 9 EX-LINK Conector sólo para servicio. 0 USB 1 (HDD) / USB 2 Conector para actualizaciones de software, Media Play, etc. Se puede conectar la red inalámbrica de Samsung mediante el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’ (se vende por separado). N Para el disco duro de USB, use el puerto USB 1 (HDD). N Si enciende o apaga el televisor mientras un dispositivo USB está conectado puede dañar los archivos que éste contiene. ! AUDIO OUT Permite conectar los terminales de la entrada de audio del amplificador/sistema de Cine en casa. N En la conexión, utilice el conector apropiado (se vende por separado). N Cuando un amplificador de audio se conecta a los terminales AUDIO OUT: Reduzca el volumen del TV y ajuste el volumen con el control del amplificador. @ DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) Se conecta a un componente de audio digital como un receptor del sistema Cine en casa. N Cuando un sistema de audio digital se conecta al terminal DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL): Reduzca el volumen del TV y ajuste el volumen con el control del sistema. N El audio de 5.1 canales es posible cuando el televisor está conectado a un dispositivo externo que admita 5.1 canales. N Cuando el receptor del sistema Cine en casa está activado, se puede oír la salida de sonido desde el terminal óptico del televisor. Cuando se ve la televisión a través de un DTV (aéreo), el televisor envía el sonido de 5.1 canales al receptor del sistema Cine en casa Cuando la fuente es un componente digital, como un DVD / Blu-ray / receptor de cable o satélite (decodificador), y está conectada al televisor a través de HDMI, sólo se oye el sonido de 2 canales del receptor del sistema Cine en casa. Si desea oír audio de 5.1 canales, conecte el terminal de salida de audio digital del DVD / Blu-ray / receptor de cable o satélite (decodificador) directamente a un amplificador o un sistema Cine en casa, no al televisor. Español - 13 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 13 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:48 CANAL Puede configurar diversas opciones para los canales de televisión con funciones como Prog. Auto, Canales Favoritos e Intensidad de Señal. ¦ Menú del canal ❑ Antena → Aire / Cable ❑ Prog. Auto ■ Canal Antes de empezar a memorizar los canales disponibles, debe indicar el tipo de origen de la señal conectada al TV (es decir, antena o sistema de cable). T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede configurar la antena con Herramientas → Cambiar a Cable (o Cambiar a Aire). Antena : Aire ▶ Prog. Auto Borrar canal encriptado Lista de canales Sintonia Fina Aire: Señal de antena aérea. / Cable: Señal de antena del cable. / Auto: Señales de antena aérea y de cable. N Cuando se selecciona Cable, también se puede seleccionar el sistema de cable. STD, HRC e IRC identifican los diversos tipos de sistemas de televisión por cable. Póngase en contacto con su proveedor de cable para averiguar el tipo de sistema de cable existente en su zona. En este momento ya se ha seleccionado el origen de la señal. N Una vez guardados todos los canales disponibles, se inicia la eliminación de los canales codificados (Eliminando los canales encriptados). Vuelve a mostrarse el menú de programación automática. N Si desea detener la programación automática, pulse el botón ENTERE. Aparece el mensaje ¿Detener programación automática?. Selección Sí con el botón ◄ o ► y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. ❑ Borrar canal encriptado (sólo canales digitales) Esta función se usa para filtrar los canales codificados después de que Prog. Auto se haya completado. Puede tardar de 20 a 30 minutos. N Para detener la búsqueda de canales codificados: Pulse el botón ENTERE para seleccionar Detener. Pulse el botón ◄ para seleccionar Sí y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Esta función sólo está disponible en el modo Cable. ❑ Lista de canales Para conocer el procedimiento detallado sobre cómo usar la Lista de canales, consulte las instrucciones de ‘Gestión de los canales’. (consulte la páginas 15~16) O Puede seleccionar estas opciones pulsando el botón CH LIST del mando a distancia. ❑ Sintonia Fina (sólo canales analógicos) Utilice la sintonización fina para ajustar manualmente un determinado canal a fin de que la recepción sea óptima. N Si no almacena en la memoria el canal que ha ajustado de manera precisa, los ajustes no se guardan. N El símbolo ‘*’ aparecerá junto al nombre de los canales cuya sintonización se haya ajustado. N Para restablecer la sintonía fina, pulse el botón ▼ para seleccionar Reiniciar y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Español - 14 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 14 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:49 ¦ Gestión de los canales ■ Todos los canales Muestra todos los canales disponibles actualmente. ■ Canales agregados Muestra todos los canales añadidos. Canales agregados Con este menú puede agregar y borrar los canales o configurarlos como favoritos y usar la guía de programas de las emisoras digitales. Aire 2 Aire 4 Aire 4-2 *TV #8 8 Aire 13 Aire 13-1 * TV #3 Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland Antena Zoom Selección T Herramientas ■ Favoritos Muestra todos los canales favoritos. O Si desea seleccionar los canales favoritos que ha configurado, pulse el botón FAV.CH en el mando a distancia. ■ Grabación con temporizador Muestra todos los programas actualmente reservados. N Seleccione un canal en la pantalla Todos los canales, Canales agregados o Favoritos pulsando los botones ▲/▼ y pulse el botón ENTERE. A continuación puede ver el canal seleccionado. N Uso de los botones de colores en la lista de canales Rojo (Antena): Cambia a Aire o Cable. Verde (Zoom): Amplía o disminuye el número del canal. Amarillo (Selección): Selecciona varias listas de canales. Puede aplicar la función de Agregar/Borrar o de Agregar a Favoritos/Borrar de Favoritos en la lista de favoritos a varios canales al mismo tiempo. Seleccione los canales que desee y pulse el botón amarillo para configurar los canales seleccionados al mismo tiempo. La marca c aparece a la izquierda de los canales seleccionados. TOOLS (Herramientas): Muestra los menús Agregar (o Borrar), Agregar a Favoritos (o Borrar de Favoritos), Visualiz. Con temporiz., Edición de nombre de canal, Seleccionar todo (o Deseleccionar todos) y Prog. Auto (los menús de las opciones pueden cambiar, dependiendo de la situación.) N Iconos de la pantalla de estado del canal c : Un canal seleccionado con el botón amarillo. ( : Un programa que se está emitiendo. * : Un canal configurado como favorito. ) : Un programa reservado. Menú de opciones de la lista de canales (en Todos los canales / Canales agregados / Favoritos) ■ Agregar / Borrar Puede suprimir o añadir un canal para que se muestren los canales que desee. N Todos los canales borrados se mostrarán en el menú Todos los canales. N Un canal de color gris quiere decir que se ha borrado. N El menú Agregar sólo aparece con los canales borrados. N También puede borrar un canal en los menús Canales agregados o Favoritos de la misma manera. Todos los canales N Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú de opciones. N Los elementos del menú de opciones pueden variar según el estado del canal. Aire 2 Aire 4 Aire Borrar Agregar a Favoritos 4-2 * TV #8 Visualiz. con temporiz. 8 Aire Edición de nombre de canal 13 Aire Seleccionar todo 13-1 * TV #3 Alice’s Adventures Prog. Auto in Wonderland Antena Zoom Selección T Herramientas Español - 15 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 15 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:49 ■ Agregar a Favoritos / Borrar de Favoritos Puede configurar como favoritos los canales que vea con más frecuencia. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede añadir o borrar canales favoritos seleccionando Herramientas → Agregar a Favoritos (o Borrar de Favoritos). N Se mostrará el símbolo ‘*’ y el canal se configurará como favorito. N Todos los canales favoritos se mostrarán en el menú Favoritos. ■ Visualiz. con temporiz. Si reserva un programa que desea ver, el canal se cambia automáticamente al canal reservado en la lista de canales aunque esté viendo otro canal. Para reservar un programa primero debe configurar la hora actual. N Sólo se pueden reservar los canales memorizados. N Puede ajustar el canal, el día, el mes, el año, la hora y el minuto directamente pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia. N La reserva de un programa se mostrará en el menú Grabación con temporizador. N Guía de programas digitales y reserva de visualización Si se ha seleccionado un canal digital y se pulsa el botón ► aparece la guía de programas del canal. Se puede reservar un programa mediante el procedimiento descrito anteriormente. ■ Edición de nombre de canal (sólo canales analógicos) Los canales se pueden etiquetar con el propósito de que al seleccionar éstos se pueda ver su nombre. N Los nombres de los canales digitales se asignan automáticamente y no se pueden etiquetar. ■ Seleccionar todo / Deseleccionar todos ● Seleccionar todo: Puede seleccionar todos los canales de la lista. ● Deseleccionar todos: Puede deseleccionar todos los canales seleccionados. N Sólo podrá seleccionar Deseleccionar todos si ha seleccionado un canal. ■ Prog. Auto N Para conocer el procedimiento detallado sobre cómo usar la Prog. Auto, consulte las instrucciones de ‘Menú del canal’. (consulte la página 14) Menús de opciones de la lista de canales (en Grabación con temporizador) ■ Cambiar información Selecciónelo para cambiar la reserva de visualización. ■ Cancelar programaciones Selecciónelo para cancelar la reserva de visualización. ■ Información Selecciónelo para ver una reserva de visualización. (También puede cambiar la información de la reserva.) ■ Seleccionar todo Seleccionar todos los programas reservados. Grabación con temporizador Se puede ver, cambiar o borrar una reserva. N Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú de opciones. Aire 1 / 1 / 2009 1:59 5 TV1 ) Cambiar información Cancelar programaciones ecualizador 2:59 2 TV3 ) El Información Seleccionar 3:59 2 TV3 ) McMillan & Wifetodo 4:59 2 TV3 ) M.Spillane’s mike Antena Zoom Selección T Herramientas E Información Español - 16 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 16 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:49 IMAGEN Puede configurar diversas opciones de imágenes tales como el modo de imagen, el formato y el color para fijar sus preferencias personales. ¦ Configuración del menú de imagen ❑ Modo ■ Dinámico Selecciona la visualización con una definición mejorada, en una habitación luminosa. ■ Normal Selecciona la visualización óptima de la imagen, en un entorno normal. ■ Natural Selecciona la visualización óptima y más confortable de la imagen. N Natural no está disponible en los modo PC. ■ Cine Selecciona la visualización para ver películas en una sala oscura. Imagen Puede seleccionar el tipo de imagen que mejor cumpla sus requisitos de visualización. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede configurar el modo de la imagen seleccionando Herramientas → Imagen Modo. Modo : Normal Luz de fondo Contraste Brillo Definición Color Tinte (V/R) Configuración avanzada :5 : 95 : 45 : 50 : 50 : V50/R50 ▶ ❑ Luz de fondo / Contraste / Brillo / Definición / Color / Tinte (V/R) El televisor tiene varias opciones de configuración que permiten controlar la calidad de la ▲ Luz de fondo 5 imagen. ▼ ● Luz de fondo: Ajusta el brillo de la luz de fondo de la pantalla LED. U Mover L Ajustar E Ingresar R Regresar ● Contraste: Ajusta el nivel del contraste de la imagen. ● Brillo: Ajusta el nivel del brillo de la imagen. ● Definición: Ajusta la definición de los bordes de la imagen. ● Color: Ajusta la saturación del color de la imagen. ● Tinte (V/R): Ajusta el matiz del color de la imagen. N Cuando haga cambios en Luz de fondo, Contraste, Brillo, Definición, Color o Tinte (V/R) el color de la OSD también se ajustará. N En el modo PC, sólo se pueden hacer cambios en Luz de fondo, Contraste y Brillo. N La configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado a una entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar. N La energía consumida durante el uso se puede reducir significativamente si se disminuye el nivel del brillo de la imagen, ya que así se reduce el coste total de funcionamiento. ❑ Configuración avanzada Los nuevos televisores Samsung permiten una configuración más precisa de la imagen que los modelos anteriores. N Configuración avanzada está disponible en los modos Normal o Cine. N En el modo PC, sólo se pueden cambiar Contraste Dinám., Gamma y Balance de blanco entre las opciones de Configuración avanzada. ■ Tono del negro → Apagado / Oscuro / Más oscuro / El más oscuro Se puede seleccionar el nivel de negro en la pantalla para ajustar la profundidad de ésta. Configuración avanzada Tono del negro : Apagado Contraste Dinám. : Medio Gamma :0 Espacio de color : Nativo ▶ Balance de blanco Tono Piel :0 Mejora de perfiles : Encendido ▼ U Mover E Ingresar R Regresar Español - 17 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 17 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:49 ■ Contraste Dinám. → Apagado / Bajo / Medio / Alto Se puede ajustar el contraste de la pantalla para conseguir un contraste óptimo. ■ Gamma Se puede ajustar la intensidad de los colores primarios (rojo, verde y azul). ■ Espacio de color El espacio de color es una matriz compuesta por los colores rojo, verde y azul. Seleccione su espacio de color favorito y disfrute de unos colores auténticamente naturales. ● Auto: El espacio de color automático ajusta el tono de color natural de acuerdo con las fuentes del programa. ● Nativo: El espacio de color nativo proporciona tonos de color profundos y ricos. ● Favorito: Ajusta la gamma del color según las preferencias del usuario. N Al cambiar el valor de ajuste se actualizará la pantalla ajustada. N La configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado a una entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar. Por ejemplo, si se tiene un reproductor DVD conectado a HDMI 1 y está seleccionado, se guardarán la configuración y los ajustes del reproductor DVD. Color: Rojo, Verde, Azul, Amarillo, Cian o Magenta N Color está disponible si Espacio de color está configurado como Favorito. N En Color, se pueden ajustar los valores RGB del color seleccionado. N Para restablecer el valor RGB ajustado, seleccione Reiniciar. Rojo: Ajusta el nivel de saturación del rojo del color seleccionado. Verde: Ajusta el nivel de saturación del verde del color seleccionado. Azul: Ajusta el nivel de saturación del azul del color seleccionado. Reiniciar: Restablece la gama de colores en los valores predeterminados. ■ Balance de blanco Se puede ajustar la temperatura del color para conseguir colores más naturales. ● Bal. Rojo: Ajusta la intensidad del color rojo. ● Bal. Verde: Ajusta la intensidad del color verde. ● Bal. Azul: Ajusta la intensidad del color azul. ● Gan. Rojo: Ajusta el brillo del color rojo. ● Gan. Verde: Ajusta el brillo del color verde. ● Gan. Azul: Ajusta el brillo del color azul. ● Reiniciar: El balance de blanco anteriormente ajustado se restablecerá con los valores predefinidos de fábrica. ■ Tono Piel Permite acentuar el ‘tono piel’ rosado de las imágenes. N Al cambiar el valor de ajuste se actualizará la pantalla ajustada. ■ Mejora de perfiles → Apagado / Encendido Permite acentuar los bordes de los objetos en las imágenes. ■ xvYCC → Apagado / Encendido Si activa el modo xvYCC se aumenta el detalle y el espacio de color mientras se ven películas desde un dispositivo externo (por ejemplo, un reproductor DVD) conectado en las tomas HDMI o Component IN. N xvYCC está disponible cuando el modo de imagen está configurado en Cine y la entrada externa está establecida en los modos HDMI o Componente. ■ LED Motion plus → Apagado / Encendido Elimina los retrasos de las escenas rápidas con mucho movimiento para conseguir imágenes más claras. Español - 18 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 18 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:49 ❑ Opciones de imagen N En el modo PC sólo se pueden hacer cambios en los elementos Tono Color, Tamaño y LED Inteligente del menú Opciones de imagen. ■ ■ Tono Color → Frío / Normal / Tibio1 / Tibio2 / Tibio3 N Tibio1, Tibio2 o Tibio3 sólo están disponibles cuando el modo de imagen está configurado en Cine. N La configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado a una entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar. Opciones de imagen Tono Color : Normal Tamaño : 16:9 Digital NR : Auto N.neg HDMI : Normal Modo película : Apagado Sólo modo azul : Apagado Auto Motion Pro 240Hz ▶ : Normal ▼ U Mover E Ingresar R Regresar Tamaño Es posible que alguna vez desee cambiar el tamaño de la imagen en la pantalla. El televisor se suministra con varias opciones de tamaño de la pantalla, cada una diseñada para que funcione lo mejor posible con tipos específicos de entrada de vídeo. Es posible que el receptor de satélite o cable tenga también su propia gama de tamaños de pantalla. Sin embargo, en general, debe ver el televisor en el modo 16:9 tanto como sea posible. O También se puede pulsar varias veces el botón P.SIZE del mando a distancia para cambiar el tamaño de la imagen. ● 16:9: Establece la imagen en modo panorámico 16:9. ● Zoom1: Aumenta el tamaño de la imagen en la pantalla. ● Zoom2: Aumenta el tamaño de la imagen más aún que el modo Zoom1. ● Ajuste ancho: Amplía la relación de aspecto de la imagen para que se ajuste al ancho total de la pantalla. ● 4:3: Establece la imagen en modo normal 4:3. ● Ajuste pantalla: Use esta función para ver toda la imagen sin cortes cuando se reciban señales de HDMI (720p/1080i/ 1080p), Componente (1080i/1080p) o DTV (1080i). 16:9 16:9 Zoom1 U Mover Zoom2 U Mover Zoom1 Zoom2 Ajuste ancho U Mover 4:3 Ajuste ancho 4:3 Ajuste pantalla Ajuste pantalla N Si se ha seleccionado el modo doble (Œ, À) en el modo PIP (consulte la página 21), el tamaño de la imagen no se puede definir. N Puede producirse una retención temporal de imagen cuando se ve una imagen estática durante más de dos horas. N Después de seleccionar Zoom1, Zoom2 o Ajuste ancho: Pulse el botón ► para seleccionar Position y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para desplazar la imagen hacia arriba o hacia abajo. A continuación pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse el botón ► para seleccionar Tamaño y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Utilice los botones ▲ o ▼ para ampliar o reducir el tamaño de la imagen en dirección vertical. A continuación pulse el botón ENTERE. N Después de seleccionar Ajuste pantalla en los modos HDMI (1080i/1080p) o Componente (1080i/1080p), quizás deba centrar la imagen: Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar Posición y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Pulse los botones ▲, ▼, ◄ o ► para mover la imagen. Reiniciar: Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar Reiniciar y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Puede inicializar la configuración. N HD (alta definición): 16:9 - 1080i/1080p (1920 x 1080), 720p (1280 x 720) N La configuración de cada dispositivo externo conectado a una entrada del televisor se puede ajustar y guardar. Fuente entrada ATV, AV, Componente (480i, 480p) DTV(1080i), Componente (1080i, 1080p), HDMI (720p, 1080i, 1080p) PC Imagen Tamaño 16:9, Zoom1, Zoom2, 4:3 16:9, 4:3, Ajuste ancho, Ajuste pantalla 16:9, 4:3 Español - 19 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 19 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:50 ■ Digital NR → Apagado / Bajo / Medio / Alto / Auto Si la señal de emisión que recibe el televisor es débil, puede activarse la función Digital Noise Reduction para reducir la estática y las imágenes superpuestas que pueden aparecer en la pantalla. N Cuando la señal sea débil, seleccione alguna de las otras opciones hasta que se vea una imagen de mejor calidad. ■ N.neg HDMI → Normal / Bajo Se puede seleccionar el nivel de negro en la pantalla para ajustar la profundidad de ésta. N Esta función sólo está activa cuando un dispositivo externo está conectado al televisor a través de HDMI. La función N.neg HDMI puede que no sea compatible con dispositivos externos. ■ Modo película → Apagado / Auto1 / Auto2 El televisor se puede configurar para que perciba y procese automáticamente las señales de película de todas las fuentes y ajuste la mejor calidad de imagen. N Modo película es compatible con TV, Video, Componente (480i/1080i) y HDMI (480i/1080i). ● Apagado: Desactiva la función del modo de película. ● Auto1: Ajusta automáticamente la imagen con la mejor calidad cuando se ve una película. ● Auto2: Optimiza automáticamente el texto de vídeo en la pantalla (sin incluir los subtítulos para sordos) cuando se ve una película. ■ Sólo modo azul → Apagado / Encendido Esta función es para expertos en la medición de dispositivos AV. Esta función muestra sólo una señal azul ya que se eliminan las señales rojas y verdes de la señal de vídeo a fin de proporcionar un efecto de filtro azul que se usa para ajustar el color y el matiz de los equipos de vídeo, como reproductores DVD, sistemas Cine en casa, etc. Con esta función, se puede ajustar el color y el matiz de acuerdo con los valores preferidos adecuados al nivel de la señal de cada dispositivo de vídeo mediante los patrones de barras de colores rojo / verde / azul / cián / magenta / amarillo, sin usar un filtro azul adicional. N Sólo modo azul está disponible cuando el modo de imagen está configurado como Cine o Nomal. ■ Auto Motion Pro 240Hz → Apagado / Claro / Normal / Suave / Favorito / Demo Elimina los retrasos de las escenas rápidas con mucho movimiento para conseguir imágenes más claras. N Si se habilita Auto Motion Pro 240Hz, se puede producir ruido en la pantalla. Si esto ocurre, establezca Auto Motion Pro 240Hz como Apagado. N Cuando LED Inteligente está configurado como Demo, la opción Demo de Auto Motion Pro 240Hz no está disponible. ● Apagado: Auto Motion Pro 240Hz des. ● Claro: Configura Auto Motion Pro 240Hz al mínimo. ● Normal: Configura Auto Motion Pro 240Hz con el valor medio. ● Suave: Configura Auto Motion Pro 240Hz al máximo. ● Favorito: Ajusta el nivel de reducción de desenfoque y vibración según las preferencias del usuario. Red. Borr. Imag.: Ajusta el nivel de reducción de desenfoque en las fuentes de vídeo. Red. Vibr. Imag.: Ajusta el nivel de reducción de la vibración en las fuentes de vídeo al reproducir películas. Reiniciar: Reinicia la configuración personalizada. ● Demo: Muestra la diferencia entre los modos activado y desactivado de Auto Motion Pro 240Hz. ■ LED Inteligente → Apagado / Encendido / Demo Controla la luz de fondo del LED para mejorar la claridad de la imagen. N Cuando Auto Motion Pro 240Hz está configurado como Demo, la opción Demo de LED Inteligente no está disponible. ● Apagado: Desactiva el modo LED Inteligente. ● Encendido: Activa el modo LED Inteligente. ● Demo: Muestra la diferencia entre los modos activado y desactivado LED Inteligente. La pantalla después de aplicar LED Inteligente aparece a la izquierda. ❑ Reinicio de la imagen → Reinic. modo imagen / Cancelar Devuelve todos los ajustes de Imagen a los valores predeterminados. N Reinic. modo imagen: Los valores de la imagen actual regresan a los predeterminados. Español - 20 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 20 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:50 ¦ Visualización PIP (Imagen en imagen) Imagen principal Componente HDMI1/DVI, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4 PC Configuración Puede usar la función PIP para ver simultáneamente la televisión y una fuente de vídeo externa. Este producto lleva un sintonizador incorporado que no permite la función PIP en el mismo modo. En el apartado ‘Configuración de PIP’ encontrará más detalles. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede establecer la configuración PIP relacionada seleccionando Herramientas → PIP. N Si selecciona el sonido de la imagen PIP, consulte el apartado ‘Configuración del menú de sonido’. (consulte la página 25) N Configuración de PIP Efecto de luz Ahorro energía : Modo vis. act. : Apagado PIP ▶ Imagen secundaria TV N Con la opción V-Chip o Internet@TV activada, la función PIP no se puede usar. N Si mientras mira la televisión en el modo PIP, apaga el televisor y vuelve a encenderlo, la ventana PIP desaparecerá. N Puede notar que la imagen de la ventana PIP llega a ser ligeramente artificial cuando utiliza la pantalla principal para visualizar juegos o karaoke. ■ ■ ■ PIP PIP → Encendido / Apagado Puede activar o desactivar la función PIP. Tamaño → Õ / à / À / Œ Puede seleccionar el tamaño de la imagen PIP. Posición → à / – / — / œ Puede seleccionar la posición de la imagen PIP. N En el modo doble (Œ, À), Posición no se puede seleccionar. ■ Aire / Cable → Aire / Cable Puede seleccionar como aérea o por cable la fuente de entrada de la pantalla secundaria. ■ Canal Puede seleccionar el canal de la pantalla secundaria. PIP : Encendido Tamaño :Õ Posición :à Aire/Cable : Aire Canal : Aire 3 ▶ U Mover E Ingresar R Regresar Español - 21 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 21 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:50 ¦ Uso del televisor como una pantalla de ordenador (PC) Configuración del software del PC (basado en Windows XP) A continuación se muestra la configuración de pantalla de Windows para un ordenador típico. Probablemente la pantalla real de su PC sea distinta, según la versión concreta de Windows y de la tarjeta de vídeo que tenga. Aunque las pantallas reales sean diferentes, la información de configuración básica que se aplica en casi todos los casos es la misma. (En caso contrario, póngase en contacto con el fabricante del ordenador o con el distribuidor de Samsung.) 1. Primero, haga clic en ‘Panel de control’ en el menú Inicio de Windows. 2. Cuando aparezca la ventana del panel de control, haga clic en ‘Apariencia y temas’ y aparecerá un cuadro de diálogo. 3. Cuando aparezca la pantalla del Panel de control, haga clic en ‘Pantalla’ y aparecerá un cuadro de diálogo. 4. Seleccione la ficha ‘Configuración’ en el cuadro de diálogo. Configuración correcta del tamaño (resolución) - Óptima: 1920 x 1080 píxeles Si existe una opción de frecuencia vertical en el cuadro de diálogo de configuración de la pantalla, el valor correcto es ‘60’ o ‘60 Hz’. En caso contrario, haga clic en ‘Aceptar’ y salga del cuadro de diálogo. Modos de pantalla Si la señal del sistema es igual al modo de señal estándar, la pantalla se ajusta automáticamente. Si la señal del sistema no es igual al modo de señal estándar, ajuste el modo consultando la guía del usuario de la tarjeta de vídeo; de lo contrario, puede no haber señal de vídeo. La imagen de pantalla se ha optimizado durante la fabricación para los modos de visualización enumerados en la página siguiente. ■ Entradas D-Sub y HDMI/DVI N Cuando se usa una conexión de cable HDMI/DVI, se debe conectar en el terminal HDMI IN 1(DVI). Modo Resolución Frecuencia horizontal (kHz) Frecuencia vertical (Hz) Frecuencia de reloj de píxeles (MHz) IBM 640 x 350 720 x 400 640 x 480 832 x 624 1152 x 870 720 x 576 1152 x 864 1280 x 720 1280 x 720 1280 x 960 640 x 480 640 x 480 640 x 480 800 x 600 800 x 600 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 1152 x 864 1280 x 1024 1280 x 1024 1280 x 800 1280 x 800 1280 x 960 1360 x 768 1440 x 900 1440 x 900 1680 x 1050 1280 x 720 1280 x 1024 31.469 31.469 35.000 49.726 68.681 35.910 53.783 44.772 56.456 75.231 31.469 37.861 37.500 37.879 48.077 46.875 48.363 56.476 60.023 67.500 63.981 79.976 49.702 62.795 60.000 47.712 55.935 70.635 65.290 52.500 74.620 70.086 70.087 66.667 74.551 75.062 59.950 59.959 59.855 74.777 74.857 59.940 72.809 75.000 60.317 72.188 75.000 60.004 70.069 75.029 75.000 60.020 75.025 59.810 74.934 60.000 60.015 59.887 74.984 59.954 70.000 70.000 25.175 28.322 30.240 57.284 100.000 32.750 81.750 74.500 95.750 130.000 25.175 31.500 31.500 40.000 50.000 49.500 65.000 75.000 78.750 108.000 108.000 135.000 83.500 106.500 108.000 85.500 106.500 136.750 146.250 89.040 128.943 Polaridad de sincronización (H / V) +/-/+ -/-/-/-/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ -/-/-/+/+ +/+ +/+ -/-/+/+ +/+ +/+ +/+ -/+ -/+ +/+ +/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ -/+ -/- 1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 +/+ MAC VESA CVT VESA DMT VESA GTF VESA DMT / DTV CEA Español - 22 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 22 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:50 ¦ Ajuste del televisor con el ordenador N Preselección: Pulse el botón SOURCE para seleccionar el modo PC. ❑ Ajuste Automático Brillo Definición Imagen Mediante la función de ajuste automático se puede establecer que el televisor se ajuste automáticamente de acuerdo con las señales de vídeo que reciba. La función también ajusta automáticamente con más configuración y ajusta los valores y las posiciones de la frecuencia. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede establecer el ajuste automático seleccionando Herramientas → Ajuste Automático. N Esta función no se puede utilizar en modo DVI-Digital. : 45 : 50 Ajuste Automático ▶ Pantalla Configuración avanzada Opciones de imagen Reinicio de la imagen ❑ Pantalla ■ ■ ■ Grueso / Fino El objetivo del ajuste de la calidad de imagen es eliminar o reducir las interferencias. Si el ruido no desaparece sólo con la sintonización fina, realice los ajustes de frecuencia hasta el máximo (Grueso) y vuelva a realizar la sintonización fina. Después de reducir el ruido, vuelva a ajustar la imagen para que quede alineada en el centro de la pantalla. Posición de PC Ajuste la posición de la pantalla del PC si no se acopla a la pantalla del TV. Pulse los botones ▲ o ▼ para ajustar la posición vertical. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para ajustar posición horizontal. Pantalla Grueso 50 Fino 0 Posición de PC Reiniciar Imagen U Mover E Ingresar R Regresar Reiniciar Imagen Puede recuperar todos los ajustes de imagen predeterminados de fábrica. Español - 23 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 23 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:51 SONIDO Puede configurar el modo de sonido, el volumen, las opciones de sonido para varias pistas, etc. ¦ Configuración del menú de sonido ❑ Modo → Normal / Música / Cine / Voz clara / Favorito Sonido T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede configurar el modo del sonido seleccionando Herramientas → Sonido Modo. ● Normal: Selecciona el modo de sonido normal. ● Música: Realza la música respecto de las voces. ● Cine: Proporciona el mejor sonido para ver películas. ● Voz clara: Realza las voces respecto de los sonidos. ● Favorito: Recupera la configuración de sonido personalizada. Modo : Favorito Ecualizador SRS TruSurround HD Idioma preferido Sonido Multi-track Vol.Auto Seleccionar altavoz Sel. Sonido : Apagado : Español : Mono : Apagado : Altavoz de TV : Principal ▶ ❑ Ecualizador Es posible ajustar los parámetros del sonido según sus preferencias personales. ● Modo: Selecciona el modo de sonido entre los valores predefinidos. ● Balance I/D: Ajusta el balance entre los altavoces izquierdo y derecho. ● 100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (ajuste de ancho de banda): Para ajustar el nivel de las diferentes frecuencias de ancho de banda. ● Reiniciar: Devuelve los ajustes del ecualizador a los valores predeterminados. ❑ SRS TruSurround HD → Apagado / Encendido TruSurround HD es una tecnología SRS patentada que solventa el problema de reproducir contenido multicanal 5.1 en dos altavoces. TruSurround proporciona una experiencia de sonido virtual convincente a través de cualquier sistema de reproducción con dos altavoces, incluso con los altavoces internos del televisor. Es totalmente compatible con todos los formatos multicanal. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede establecer SRS TruSurround HD seleccionando Herramientas → SRS TS HD. ❑ Idioma preferido (sólo canales digitales) El sistema de emisión de TV digital permite transmitir simultáneamente muchas pistas de audio (por ejemplo, traducciones simultáneas del programa en otros idiomas). N Puede seleccionar un idioma que no sea el Idioma preferido pulsando el botón MTS del mando a distancia. N Idioma preferido está disponible sólo en el modo de televisión digital. N Sólo se puede seleccionar uno de los idiomas que ofrece la emisora. ❑ Sonido Multi-track (MTS) (sólo canales analógicos) Pulse varias veces el botón MTS del mando a distancia para seleccionar Mono, Estéreo o SAP. Mono: Elija para canales que emiten en monoaural o si tiene dificultades con la recepción de señales estéreo. Estéreo: Elija para canales que emiten en estéreo. SAP: Elija esta opción para escuchar el programa de audio independiente, que normalmente es una traducción de otro idioma. N Sonido Multi-track está disponible sólo en el modo de televisión analógica. N Según el programa concreto emitido, puede escuchar en Mono, Estéreo o SAP. O ● ● ● Español - 24 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 24 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:51 ❑ Vol.Auto → Apagado / Encendido Cada emisora tiene sus propias condiciones de señal y resulta incómodo ajustar el volumen cada vez que se cambia de canal. Esta función permite ajustar automáticamente el volumen de un canal disminuyendo la salida de sonido cuando la señal de modulación es alta o aumentando la salida de sonido cuando la señal de modulación es baja. ❑ Seleccionar altavoz Cuando se ve el televisor conectado a un sistema Cine en casa, se debe apagar el altavoz del televisor para que la salida de audio del televisor utilice los altavoces del Cine en casa (externos). ● Altavoz externo: Utiliza los altavoces externos (Cine en casa) para la salida del sonido. ● Altavoz de TV: Utiliza los altavoces del TV para la salida del sonido. N Los botones de volumen y MUTE no funcionan si Seleccionar altavoz está establecido en Altavoz externo. Configure el volumen del sistema Cine en casa. N Si selecciona Altavoz externo en el menú Seleccionar altavoz, se limita la configuración del sonido. Altavoces internos del televisor Altavoz de TV Altavoz externo Sin señal del vídeo RF / AV / Componente / PC / HDMI Salida de sonido Silencio Silencio Salida de Audio (Optical, L/R Out) para el sistema de sonido RF / AV / Componente / PC / HDMI Salida de sonido Salida de sonido Silencio ❑ Sel. Sonido → Principal / Sub Cuando la opción PIP está activada, se puede escuchar el sonido de la imagen secundaria (PIP). N Puede seleccionar esta opción cuando PIP está ajustado como Encendido. T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede configurar el sonido de la imagen secundaria seleccionando Herramientas → PIP → Sel. Sonido. ❑ Reinicio del sonido → Reiniciar todo / Reinic. modo sonido / Cancelar Puede restaurar la configuración del sonido con los valores predeterminados de fábrica. N Reinic. modo sonido: Los valores del sonido actual regresan a los predeterminados. Reinicio del sonido Seleccionar las opciones de reinicio del sonido. Reiniciar todo Reinic. modo sonido Cancelar L Mover E Ingresar R Regresar Español - 25 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 25 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:51 CONFIGURACIÓN Puede ajustar las funciones adicionales del televisor. ¦ Configuración del menú de configuración ❑ Idioma Plug & Play ❑ Tiempo Para conocer el procedimiento detallado sobre las opciones de configuración, consulte la instrucciones de ‘Configuración de la hora’. (consulte la páginas 29~30) ❑ Modo Juego → Apagado / Encendido Configuración Puede configurar el idioma del menú. Idioma Tiempo Modo Juego BD Wise Tipo de red Configuración de red V-Chip Subtítulo : Español ▶ : Apagado : Encendido : Cable Si conecta una consola de videojuegos, como PlayStation™ o Xbox™, podrá disfrutar de sensaciones más realistas seleccionando el menú de juegos. N Restricciones respecto al modo de juego (precaución) Para desconectar la consola de videojuegos y conectar otro dispositivo externo, configure Modo Juego en Apagado en el menú de configuración Cuando se muestra el menú de TV en el Modo Juego, la pantalla tiembla ligeramente. N Modo Juego no está disponible en los modos normales de TV y PC. N Con PIP activo, la función Modo Juego no se puede utilizar. N Si la imagen es deficiente cuando se conecta el dispositivo externo al televisor, compruebe si el Modo Juego está en Encendido. Configure Modo Juego en Apagado y conecte los dispositivos externos. N Si Modo Juego está activado: El modo de imagen cambia automáticamente a Normal y no se puede cambiar. El modo de sonido cambia automáticamente a Favorito y no se puede cambiar. Ajuste el sonido con el ecualizador. La función para establecer el sonido está activada. Si selecciona la función de restablecer el sonido después de configurar el ecualizador, la configuración de éste recupera los parámetros predeterminados de fábrica. ❑ BD Wise → Apagado / Encendido Proporciona una calidad óptima de imagen para los productos DVD, Blu-ray y Cine en casa de SAMSUNG compatibles con BD Wise. Cuando se utilizan conectados a este televisor Samsung permiten disfrutar de mejores imágenes. N Conecte los productos SAMSUNG con BD Wise mediante un cable HDMI. N Si BD Wise se ha configurado en Encendido, el modo de imagen se cambia automáticamente a la resolución óptima. N BD Wise está disponible en el modo HDMI. ❑ Tipo de red / Configuración de red Para conocer el procedimiento detallado sobre las opciones de configuración, consulte la instrucciones de ‘Configuración de la red’. (consulte la páginas 34~36) ❑ V-Chip La función V-Chip bloquea automáticamente la programación que se considera inadecuada para los niños. El usuario debe escribir un número PIN (número de identificación personal) antes d28e establecer o cambiar las restricciones de V-Chip. N V-Chip no está disponible en los modos HDMI, Componente o PC. N El código PIN predeterminado para un televisor nuevo es ‘0-0-0-0’. N Perm. todo: Se pulsa para desbloquear todos los programas de televisión. / Bloq. todo: Se pulsa para bloquear todos los programas de televisión. ■ Cambiar Código Aparecerá la pantalla para cambiar el código PIN. Escriba un nuevo código PIN de 4 dígitos. En cuanto se introducen los 4 dígitos, aparece la pantalla Confirmar Nuevo Código. Vuelva a escribir los 4 dígitos. Cuando desaparezca la pantalla de confirmación, el código quedará memorizado. N Si olvida su código PIN, pulse los botones del mando a distancia siguiendo la secuencia siguiente, que restablece el código a 0-0-0-0: POWER (Apagado) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Encendido). Español - 26 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 26 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:51 ■ Bloqueo V-Chip → Apagado / Encendido Puede bloquear los programas de TV clasificados. ■ Guías pater. TV Puede bloquear los programas de TV según su clasificación. Esta función permite controlar lo Guías pater. TV que los niños pueden ver. ALL FV V S L D ● TV-Y: Niños pequeños / TV-Y7: Niños de más de 7 años / TV-G: Todos los públicos / TV-Y TV-Y7 TV-PG: Supervisión paterna / TV-14: Mayores de 14 años / TV-MA: Para adultos TV-G ● Todos: Bloquea todas las clasificaciones de TV. / FV: Violencia y fantasía / V: Violencia / TV-PG S: Situación sexual / L: Lenguaje grosero / D: Diálogo de contenido sexual TV-14 N La opción V-Chip bloqueará automáticamente las categorías que son más restrictivas. TV-MA Por ejemplo, si bloquea la categoría TV-Y, automáticamente se bloqueará TV-Y7. De n Mover E Ingresar manera similar, si bloquea la categoría TV-G, todas las categorías del grupo adolescente quedarán bloqueadas (TV-G, TV-PG, TV-14 y TV-MA). Las subclasificaciones (D, L, S, V) funcionan de manera similar. N La opción V-chip bloqueará automáticamente las categorías que son ‘más restrictivas’. Por ejemplo, si bloquea la subclasificación L en TV-PG, las subclasificaciones L en TV-14 y TV-MA se bloquearán automáticamente. Perm. todo Bloq. todo R Regresar ■ Clas. MPAA Puede bloquear las películas según su clasificación. La Asociación americana de Clas. MPAA cinematografía (MPAA) ha creado un sistema de clasificación que proporciona a padres y G tutores información sobre qué películas son apropiadas para los niños. PG Perm. todo ● G: Todos los públicos (sin restricciones). PG-13 Bloq. todo R ● PG: Se sugiere la compañía de un adulto. NC-17 ● PG-13: Menores acompañados de un adulto. X ● R: Restringido. Los niños menores de 17 años deben estar acompañados por un adulto. NR ● NC-17: Prohibida la entrada a menores de 17 años. n Mover E Ingresar R Regresar ● X: Sólo adultos. ● NR: Sin clasificación. N El V-Chip bloqueará automáticamente cualquier categoría que sea ‘más restrictiva’. Por ejemplo, si bloquea la categoría PG-13, también se bloquearán automáticamente R, NC-17 y X. ■ Inglés Canadiense ● C: Programación para niños menores de 8 años. ● C8+: Programación generalmente considerada aceptable para niños mayores de 8 años sin acompañamiento de adultos. ● G: Programación general, ideal para todas las audiencias. ● PG: Supervisión paterna. ● 14+: La programación contiene temas y contenidos que puede que no sean adecuados para menores de 14 años. ● 18+: Programación para adultos. N El V-Chip bloqueará automáticamente cualquier categoría que sea ‘más restrictiva’. Por ejemplo, si bloquea la categoría G, también se bloquearán automáticamente PG, 14+ y 18+. ■ Francés Canadiense ● G: General ● 8 ans+: Programación generalmente considerada aceptable para niños mayores de 8 años sin acompañamiento de adultos. ● 13 ans+: Es posible que la programación no sea adecuada para niños menores de 13 años. ● 16 ans+: Es posible que la programación no sea adecuada para niños menores de 16 años. ● 18 ans+: Programación restringida para adultos. N El V-Chip bloqueará automáticamente cualquier categoría que sea ‘más restrictiva’. Por ejemplo, si bloquea la categoría 8 ans+, también se bloquearán automáticamente 13 ans+, 16 ans+ y 18 ans+. Español - 27 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 27 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:51 ■ El número de todos los títulos de clasificación actual Clasificación U.S. Descargable La información de la restricción de bloqueo se puede usar mientras se ven los Título de clasificación El número del título de clasificación actual canales DTV. Clasificación U.S. Descargable N Si la información no se descarga desde la emisora, el menú Clasificación Humor Level ► 1/2 U.S. Descargable está desactivado. Perm. todo DH N La información de la restricción de bloqueo se puede descargar Bloq. todo MH automáticamente mientras se ven los canales DTV. Esto puede tardar algunos H segundos. VH EH N El menú Clasificación U.S. Descargable está disponible después de que la información se haya descargado desde la emisora. Sin embargo, según el tipo n Mover E Ingresar R Regresar de información de la emisora, el menú podría no estar disponible para su uso. N Los niveles de restricción de bloqueo difieren según la emisora. El nombre de menú predeterminado y la clasificación US descargable cambian según la información descargada. N Aunque configure la visualización en pantalla en su propio idioma, el menú Clasificación U.S. Descargable siempre lo verá en inglés. N La clasificación bloqueará automáticamente ciertas categorías que son más restrictivas. N Los títulos de clasificación (por ejemplo, Humor Level (Nivel humor), etc) y las clasificaciones de televisión (por ejemplo, DH, MH, H, etc) pueden diferir según la emisora. Cómo reiniciar el televisor cuando el V-Chip bloquea un canal (Escape de emergencia) Si el televisor sintoniza un canal restringido, el V-Chip lo bloqueará. La pantalla quedará en blanco y aparecerá el siguiente mensaje: 1. Escriba el código PIN y pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para desactivar temporalmente el bloqueo V-Chip. N Si olvida su código PIN, pulse los botones del mando a distancia siguiendo la secuencia siguiente, que restablece el código a 0-0-0-0: POWER (Apagado) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (Encendido). Clasificación recibida : MPAA X/Inglés Canadiense : C8+/LL/VH Este canal esta bloqueado por el V-Chip. Introduzca PIN para desbloquear. Cambio Ingresar Código ❑ Subtítulo (mensajes de texto en pantalla) ■ Subtítulo → Apagado / Encendido Puede activar o desactivar la función de subtítulos. Si los subtítulos no están disponibles, no se mostrarán en la pantalla. O Pulse el botón CC del mando a distancia para activar o desactivar la función de subtítulos. N La función de subtítulos no está disponible en los modos Componente, HDMI ni PC. ■ Modo de Subtítulo Puede seleccionar el modo deseado de subtítulos. N La disponibilidad de los subtítulos depende del programa que se esté emitiendo. ● Programado / CC1~CC4 / Texto1~Texto4 (sólo canales analógicos) La función de subtítulos analógicos funciona tanto en el modo de canal de televisión analógica como cuando la señal proviene de un dispositivo externo. (Dependiendo de la señal de transmisión, puede funcionar en canales digitales.) ● Programado / Servicio1~Servicio6 / CC1~CC4 / Texto1~Texto4 (sólo canales digitales) La función de subtítulos digitales funciona en canales digitales. N Servicio 1~6 pueden no estar disponibles según el tipo de emisión. ■ Opciones - Subtítulos Dig. (sólo canales digitales) ● Tamaño: Esta opción consta de Programado, Pequeño, Normal y Grande. El valor predeterminado es Normal. ● Estilo fuente: Esta opción consta de Programado, Estilo 0 ~ Estilo7. Puede cambiar el tipo de letra que desee. El valor predeterminado es Estilo 0. ● Color de primer plano: Esta opción consta de Programado, Blanco, Negro, Rojo, Verde, Azul, Amarillo, Magenta y Cian. Puede cambiar el color del texto. El valor predeterminado es Blanco. ● Color de fondo: Esta opción consta de Programado, Blanco, Negro, Rojo, Verde, Azul, Amarillo, Magenta y Cian. Puede cambiar el color del fondo de los subtítulos. El valor predeterminado es Negro. ● Opacidad de primer plano: Esta opción consta de Programado, Transparente, Traslúcido, Sólido e Intermitente. Puede cambiar la opacidad de la letra. Español - 28 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 28 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:52 ● ● N N N N Opacidad de fondo: Esta opción consta de Programado, Transparente, Traslúcido, Sólido e Intermitente. Puede cambiar la opacidad del fondo de los subtítulos. Regresar al Predeterminado: Esta opción reajusta las opciones Tamaño, Estilo fuente, Color de primer plano, Color de fondo, Opacidad de primer plano y Opacidad de fondo a sus valores predeterminados. Opciones - Subtítulos Dig. sólo están disponibles cuando Default y Servicio1 ~ Servicio6 se pueden seleccionar en el Modo de Subtítulo. La disponibilidad de los subtítulos depende del programa que se esté emitiendo. Las opciones de color de primer plano y color de fondo no se pueden ajustar con el mismo color. Opacidad de primer plano y Opacidad de fondo no se pueden establecer a la vez como transparentes. ❑ Melodía → Apagado / Bajo / Medio / Alto Se puede establecer un sonido de melodía que se oiga cuando el televisor se encienda o se apague. N La melodía no se reproduce. Cuando no hay salida de sonido desde el televisor porque se ha activado el botón MUTE. Cuando no hay salida de sonido desde el televisor porque se ha reducido al mínimo con el botón VOL –. Cuando la función de temporizador ha apagado el televisor. ❑ Efecto de luz → Apagado / En modo espera / Modo vis. act. / Siempre Se puede apagar o encender el LED del frontal del televisor. Apague el LED para ahorrar energía o si le molesta. ● Apagado: El LED está siempre apagado. ● En modo espera: El LED está encendido cuando el televisor está apagado. ● Modo vis. act.: El LED está encendido mientras se ve la televisión. ● Siempre: El LED está encendido siempre, sea cual sea la configuración del televisor. N Establezca Efecto de luz como Apagado para reducir el consumo de energía. N El color de la luz puede variar dependiendo del modelo. LED ❑ Ahorro energía → Apagado / Bajo / Medio / Alto / Auto Esta función ajusta el brillo del televisor, lo cual reduce el consumo de energía. Si desea ver la televisión por la noche, ajuste la opción del modo Ahorro energía en Alto; sus ojos se lo agradecerán y, además, reducirá el consumo de energía. ❑ PIP Para conocer el procedimiento detallado sobre las opciones de configuración, consulte la instrucciones de ‘Visualización PIP (Imagen en imagen)’. (consulte la página 21) ¦ Configuración de la hora ❑ Reloj ■ ■ Modo Reloj Puede configurar la hora actual en forma manual o automática. ● Auto: Configura la hora actual automáticamente usando la hora de la emisión digital. ● Manual: Configura la hora actual en una hora especificada manualmente. N Según la emisora y la señal, la hora automática no se puede ajustar correctamente. En este caso, ajuste la hora manualmente. N La antena y el cable se deben conectar para ajustar la hora automáticamente. Plug & Play Idioma Configuración Para usar las diferentes funciones del temporizador del televisor es necesario configurar el reloj. O La hora actual aparecerá siempre que se pulse el botón INFO. N Si desconecta el cable de alimentación, debe configurar el reloj de nuevo. : Español Tiempo Modo Juego BD Wise Tipo de red Configuración de red V-Chip Subtítulo Melodía : Apagado : Encendido : Cable ▶ : Medio Tiempo Reloj : -- : -- Temporizador : Apagado Temporizador 1 : Desactivado Temporizador 2 : Desactivado Temporizador 3 : Desactivado ▶ Config. Reloj Puede configurar la hora actual manualmente. U Mover E Ingresar R Regresar N Esta función sólo está disponible si Modo Reloj está configurado como Manual. N Puede ajustar el mes, el día, el año, la hora y el minuto directamente pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia. Español - 29 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 29 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:52 ■ Zona Tiempo Seleccione su zona horaria. N Esta función sólo está disponible si Modo Reloj está configurado como Auto. ■ DST (Horario de verano) → Apagado / Encendido / Auto Activa o desactiva la función Horario de Verano. N Esta función sólo está disponible si Modo Reloj está configurado como Auto. ❑ Temporizador El temporizador de desconexión apaga automáticamente el televisor después de un período prefijado (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 y 180 minutos). T Pulse el botón TOOLS para ver el menú Herramientas. También puede configurar el temporizador seleccionando Herramientas → Temporizador. N Para cancelar la función Temporizador Seleccione Apagado. ❑ Temporizador 1 / Temporizador 2 / Temporizador 3 La activación y desactivación del temporizador se puede configurar de tres maneras. Debe ajustar el reloj en primer lugar. Temporizador 1 Hora de encendido 00 00 am Inactivo Hora de apagado 00 Volumen 10 Repetir 00 Origen TV am Inactivo Antena Canal Aire 0 Dom Lun Mar Mie Jue Vie Sáb Una vez L Mover U Ajustar E Ingresar R Regresar ■ Hora de encendido Ajuste la hora, los minutos, am/pm y Activate/ Inactivate. (Para activar el temporizador con la configuración deseada, establézcalo en Activar.) ■ Hora de apagado Ajuste la hora, los minutos, am/pm y Activate/ Inactivate. (Para activar el temporizador con la configuración deseada, establézcalo en Activar.) ■ Volumen Configure el nivel de volumen deseado. ■ Origen → TV / USB / TV Memory Puede seleccionar el contenido del dispositivo TV, TV Memory o USB que se reproducirá cuando el televisor se encienda automáticamente. Seleccione TV, TV Memory o USB. (Compruebe que haya un dispositivo USB conectado al televisor.) N Si sólo hay un archivo de foto en el USB o la TV Memory, la presentación no se reproducirá. ■ Antena (cuando Origen está configurado como TV) Seleccione aérea o de cable. ■ Canal (cuando Origen está configurado como TV) Permite seleccionar el canal deseado. ■ Contenido (cuando Origen está configurado como USB o TV Memory) Se puede seleccionar una carpeta del dispositivo USB/memoria TV con archivos de música o fotos que se reproducirán cuando el televisor se encienda automáticamente. N Si el nombre de la carpeta es demasiado largo, ésta no se seleccionará. N Si usa dos dispositivos USB del mismo tipo, asegúrese de que los nombres de la carpeta sean diferentes para que se pueda leer el USB correcto. ■ Repetir Selección Una vez, Cada día, Lun~Vie, Lun~Sáb, Sáb~Dom o Manual. N Con Manual seleccionado, pulse el botón ► para seleccionar el día de la semana. Pulse el botón ENTERE sobre el día deseado; aparecerá la marca c. N Puede ajustar la hora, los minutos y el canal pulsando los botones numéricos del mando a distancia. N Apagado automático Si activa el temporizador, el televisor se apagará si no se pulsa ningún botón durante 3 horas, después que el temporizador lo haya puesto en marcha. Esta función sólo está disponible con el temporizador activado y evita el recalentamiento que se puede producir si el televisor está encendido durante demasiado tiempo. Español - 30 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 30 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:52 ¦ Conexión de la red Puede configurar el protocolo de Internet para que se pueda comunicar con diversas redes conectadas. ❑ Conexión de la red - Cable ■ Conexión LAN para un entorno DHCP A continuación se describe el procedimiento para configurar la red mediante el protocolo de configuración dinámica de host (DHCP). Dado que la dirección IP, la máscara de subred, la puerta de enlace y el DNS se asignan automáticamente cuando se selecciona DHCP, no es necesario introducirlos manualmente. 1. Conecte el puerto LAN del panel posterior del televisor y el módem externo con un cable LAN. 2. Conecte el puerto de módem de la pared y el módem externo con un cable de módem. Puerto de módem en la pared Módem externo (ADSL/VDSL/TV por cable) 2 Cable del módem Panel posterior del TV 1 Cable LAN Puede conectar la LAN con un compartidor (enrutador). Puerto de módem en la pared Módem externo (ADSL/VDSL/TV por cable) Cable del módem Panel posterior del TV Compartidor IP Cable LAN Cable LAN Puede conectar el puerto LAN y el televisor directamente según el estado de la red. Panel posterior del TV Puerto LAN en la pared Cable LAN N Los terminales (la posición del puerto y el tipo) del dispositivo externo puede variar según el fabricante. N Si falla la asignación de la dirección IP por el servidor DHCP, apague el módem externo, vuelva a encenderlo al menos después de 10 segundos e inténtelo de nuevo. N Para las conexiones entre el módem externo y el compartidor (enrutador), consulte el manual del usuario del producto correspondiente. N Se puede conectar el televisor a la LAN directamente sin usar compartidor (enrutador). N No se puede usar un módem ADSL de tipo de conexión manual ya que no admite DHCP. Se debe usar un módem ADSL de tipo de conexión automática. Español - 31 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 31 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:53 ■ Conexión LAN para un entorno IP estático A continuación se describe el procedimiento para configurar la red con una dirección IP estática. Se debe introducir manualmente la dirección IP, la máscara de subred, la puerta de enlace y el DNS proporcionados por el proveedor de servicios de Internet (ISP). 1. Conecte el puerto LAN del panel posterior del televisor y el puerto LAN de la pared con un cable LAN. Puerto LAN en la pared Panel posterior del TV 1 Cable LAN Puede conectar la LAN con un compartidor (enrutador). Puerto LAN en la pared Panel posterior del TV Compartidor IP Cable LAN Cable LAN N Las terminales (la posición del puerto y el tipo) del dispositivo externo puede variar según el fabricante. N Si usa una dirección IP estática, su ISP le informará de la dirección IP, la máscara de subred, la puerta de enlace y el DNS. Debe introducir estos valores para completar la configuración de la red. Si no los conoce, consulte a su administrador de la red. N Para obtener información sobre cómo configurar y conectar un compartidor (enrutador), consulte el manual del usuario del producto correspondiente. N Se puede conectar el televisor a la LAN directamente sin usar compartidor (enrutador). N Si usa un compartidor IP (enrutador IP) que admite DHCP, se puede configurar el dispositivo como DHCP o IP estático. N Para saber cómo usar una dirección IP estática, consulte a su proveedor de servicios de Internet. Español - 32 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 32 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:53 ❑ Conexión con la red - Inalámbrica Es posible conectar a la red de manera inalámbrica a través de un compartidor IP inalámbrico. Panel posterior del TV o Adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung Compartidor IP inalámbrico Puerto LAN en la pared Cable LAN 1. Conecte el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’ en el terminal USB 1 (HDD) o USB 2 del televisor. N Para utilizar una red inalámbrica necesita el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’ (WIS09ABGN). N El ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’ se vende por separado. El adaptador de LAN inalámbrica WIS09ABGN se ofrece a través de distribuidores seleccionados, sitios web de comercio electrónico y Samsungparts.com. N Para utilizar una red inalámbrica, el televisor debe estar conectado a un compartidor IP inalámbrico. Si el compartidor IP inalámbrico admite DHCP, el televisor puede utilizar DHCP o una dirección IP estática para conectarse a la red inalámbrica. N El adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung es compatible con IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G e IEEE 802.11N. Si reproduce el vídeo DLNA en una conexión IEEE 802.11B/G, es posible que el vídeo no se reproduzca correctamente. N Si el compartidor IP inalámbrico permite activar o desactivar la función de conexión Ping, actívela. N Seleccione un canal para el compartidor IP inalámbrico que no se esté usando en ese momento. Si el canal ajustado para el compartidor IP inalámbrico lo está usando en ese momento otro dispositivo cercano, se producirán interferencias y es posible que la comunicación falle. N Si se aplica un sistema de seguridad distinto de los sistemas que se muestran a continuación, no funcionará con el televisor. Cuando aplique la clave de seguridad para el punto de acceso (compartidor IP inalámbrico) sólo se admiten las opciones siguientes. 1) Modo de autenticación: OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK 2) Tipo de cifrado: WEP, TKIP, AES Cuando aplique la clave de seguridad para el modo Ad-hoc, sólo se admiten las opciones siguientes. 1) Modo de autenticación: SHARED, WPANONE 2) Tipo de cifrado: WEP, TKIP, AES N Si el punto de acceso admite WPS (Configuración protegida Wi-Fi), puede conectarse a la red vía PBC (Configuración del botón) o PIN (Número de identificación personal). De cualquier modo, WPS configurará automáticamente las claves SSID y WPA. N Si el dispositivo no está certificado, puede que no se conecte al televisor mediante el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’. Español - 33 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 33 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:53 ¦ Configuración de la red ❑ Tipo de red ■ Cable Se conecta a la red mediante un cable. ■ Inalámbrico Se conecta a la red de modo inalámbrico. Configuración Seleccione Cable o Inalámbrica como método para conectar con la red. N El menú sólo se activa si está conectado el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’. Modo Juego BD Wise : Apagado : Encendido Tipo de red : Cable Configuración de red V-Chip Subtítulo Melodía Efecto de luz Ahorro energía PIP ▶ : Medio : Modo vis. act. : Apagado ❑ Configuración de red ■ Configuración red cableada (cuando Tipo de red está configurado como Cable) N Compruebe si el cable LAN está conectado. ● Config. protocolo Internet → Config. automática / Config. manual ● Prueba de red: Puede comprobar o confirmar el estado de conexión de la red después de configurarla. N Cuando no pueda conectarse a una red cableada Si su proveedor de servicios de Internet ha registrado la dirección MAC del dispositivo utilizado para conectarse a Internet por primera vez y autentifica la dirección MAC cada vez que se conecta a Internet, el televisor quizás no pueda conectarse a Internet ya que la dirección MAC difiere de la del dispositivo (PC). En tal caso, solicite a su proveedor de servicios de Internet que le explique el procedimiento para conectar dispositivos que no sean un ordenador, por ejemplo su televisor, a Internet. Si su proveedor de servicios de Internet necesita un ID o una contraseña para conectarse a Internet (red) su televisor quizás no puede conectarse a Internet. En tal caso, debe introducir su ID o contraseña cuando se conecte a Internet mediante un compartidor de Internet (enrutador). La conexión de Internet puede fallar por problemas del servidor de seguridad. En este caso, póngase en contacto con el proveedor de servicios de Internet. Si no puede conectarse a Internet aunque haya seguido el procedimiento de su proveedor de servicios de Internet, debe ponerse en contacto con el centro de servicio técnico de Samsung Electronics a través de 1800-SAMSUNG. Configuración red cableada-Config. automática Si se conecta el cable LAN en una ubicación que admita DHCP, los ajustes del protocolo de Internet (IP) se configurarán automáticamente. 1. Configure Tipo de red como Cable. 2. Seleccione Configuración red cableada. 3. Configure Config. protocolo Internet como Config. automática. N El protocolo de Internet se configura automáticamente. Configuración red cableada Config. protocolo Internet : Config. automática ▶ Prueba de red Dirección IP : Máscara de subred : Puerta de enlace Servidor DNS : : U Mover E Ingresar R Regresar 4. Seleccione Prueba de red para comprobar la conectividad de la red. Configuración red cableada-Config. manual Para conectar el televisor a la LAN mediante una dirección IP estática, se debe configurar el protocolo de Internet (IP). 1. Configure Tipo de red como Cable. 2. Seleccione Configuración red cableada. 3. Configure Config. protocolo Internet como Config. manual. Configuración red cableada Config. protocolo Internet : Config. manual ▶ Prueba de red Dirección IP : 0 0 0 0 Máscara de subred : 0 0 0 0 Puerta de enlace : 0 0 0 0 Servidor DNS : 0 0 0 0 4. Configure Dirección IP, Máscara de subred, Puerta de enlace y Servidor DNS. N Pulse los botones numéricos del mando a distancia para configurar la red manualmente. U Mover E Ingresar R Regresar 5. Seleccione Prueba de red para comprobar la conectividad de la red. ■ Configuración de red inalámbrica N El menú sólo se activa si está conectado el ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’. ● Config. protocolo Internet → Config. automática / Config. manual ● Prueba de red: Puede comprobar o confirmar el estado de conexión de la red después de configurarla. Español - 34 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 34 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:54 N Cuando no pueda conectarse a un punto de acceso Su televisor quizás no pueda encontrar un punto de acceso (PA) que esté configurado como un tipo SSID privado. En tal caso, cambie la configuración del PA y vuelva a intentar la operación. Si el proveedor de servicios de Internet ha registrado la dirección MAC del dispositivo utilizado para conectarse a Internet por primera vez y autentifica la dirección MAC cada vez que se conecta a Internet, el televisor quizás no pueda conectarse a Internet ya que la dirección MAC difiere de la del dispositivo (PC). En tal caso, solicite a su proveedor de servicios de Internet que le explique el procedimiento para conectar dispositivos que no sean un ordenador, por ejemplo su televisor, a Internet. Si no puede conectarse a Internet aunque haya seguido el procedimiento de su proveedor de servicios de Internet, debe ponerse en contacto con el centro de servicio técnico de Samsung Electronics a través de 1-800-SAMSUNG. ● Seleccionar una red Nombre del punto de acceso: Puede seleccionar el compartidor IP que utilizar cuando configure una red inalámbrica. N Si algún punto de acceso no aparece en la lista, pulse el botón rojo. N Cuando se establezca la conexión, volverá a la pantalla automáticamente. Configuración de red inalámbrica N Si ha seleccionado un punto de acceso con autenticación de seguridad: Clave segur. Número A B C D E F Aparece la pantalla de la clave de seguridad. Especifique la clave de seguridad y Borrar pulse el botón azul del mando a distancia. Completado N Si el tipo de cifrado de seguridad es WEP, podrá utilizar 0~9 y A~F cuando especifique la clave de seguridad. n Mover `~9 Número E Ingresar R Regresar Conexión WPS (Configuración protegida Wi-Fi) ● Si la Clave segur. ya está configurada: En la lista de puntos de acceso, seleccione WPS. N Puede seleccionar PBC, PIN, Clave segur. Configuración de red inalámbrica Seleccionar una red Buscar Ad-hoc 3/9 sson jee AP_1 Ap_2 PBC PIN Clave segur. U Mover E Ingresar R Regresar Conexión mediante PBC: Seleccione un PBC (Configuración del botón). Pulse el botón PBC en el punto de acceso (PA) antes de 2 minutos y espere a que se efectúe la conexión. Presione el botón PBC en el punto de acceso. Nombre del punto de acceso : AP_1 Cancelar Presione Aceptar después de escribir el código PIN del TV Conexión mediante PIN: Seleccione un PIN (Número de identificación personal). mientras configura el punto de acceso. Nombre del punto de acceso : AP_1 N Se muestra un mensaje con el código PIN. Escriba el código PIN en el dispositivo Número PIN : 12345678 del punto de acceso antes de 2 minutos. Seleccione OK y espere a que se OK Cancelar efectúe la conexión. N Si esta no funciona correctamente, vuelva a intentarlo. N Cuando la conexión no se establece ni siquiera después de intentarlo de nuevo, reinicie el punto de acceso. Consulte el manual de cada punto de acceso. Conexión mediante Clave segur.: Si selecciona Clave segur., se muestra la ventana de entrada. Escriba la clave de seguridad y pulse el botón Azul. N Si esta no funciona correctamente vuelva a intentarlo. Configuración de red inalámbrica Clave segur. E F H I J K L M N O A B P Q C D R S T G U V W X Y Z Número Minúsculas Borrar Completado n Mover `~9 Número E Ingresar R Regresar ● Si la Clave segur. no está configurada: Cuando no se ha configurado una clave de seguridad en el punto de acceso compatible con WPS, puede seleccionar PBC, PIN, Sin seguridad. Sin seguridad permite la conexión directa al punto de acceso sin utilizar la función WPS. N El procedimiento de PBC, PIN es el mismo que el anterior. Consúltelo si Clave segur. ya está configurada. N Si esta no funciona correctamente vuelva a intentarlo. Configuración de red inalámbrica Seleccionar una red Buscar Ad-hoc 3/9 sson jee AP_1 Ap_2 PBC PIN Sin seguridad U Mover E Ingresar R Regresar Español - 35 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 35 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:55 Ad-hoc: No puede conectarse a un dispositivo móvil sin punto de acceso a través del ‘adaptador de LAN inalámbrica de Samsung’ mediante una red par a par. Cómo conectarse al nuevo Ad-hoc 1. Seleccione Seleccionar una red: se muestra la lista de dispositivos. 2. En la lista de dispositivos, pulse el botón azul del mando a distancia o seleccione Ad-hoc. N El mensaje El sistema de red actual quizás tenga la funcionalidad restringida. ¿Desea cambiar la conexión de red?. El sistema de red actual quizás tenga la funcionalidad restringida. ¿Desea cambiar la conexión de red? 3. Introduzca el Nombre de red (SSID) y la Clave segur. generados en el dispositivo con el que se desea conectar. Sí No Cómo conectarse a un dispositivo Ad-hoc existente 1. Seleccione Seleccionar una red; se muestra la lista de dispositivos. 2. Seleccione el dispositivo que desee en la lista. 3. Si se ha aplicado la clave de seguridad, introdúzcala de nuevo. N Si la red no funciona con normalidad, vuelva a comprobar el Nombre de red (SSID) y la Clave segur. Si la Clave segur. no es correcta, ésta puede ser la razón del mal funcionamiento. Configuración de red inalámbrica-Config. automática Si desea conectar el punto de acceso, éste debe admitir DHCP. Sólo los dispositivos compatibles con el modo Ad-hoc se pueden conectar sin DHCP. Configuración de red inalámbrica Config. protocolo Internet : Config. automática ▶ Prueba de red 1. Configure Tipo de red como Inalámbrico. Seleccionar una red : AP1 2. Selección Configuración de red inalámbrica. Dirección IP : 3. Configure Config. protocolo Internet como Config. automática. N El protocolo de Internet se configura automáticamente. Máscara de subred : Puerta de enlace Servidor DNS : : 4. Seleccione una red mediante Seleccionar una red. U Mover E Ingresar R Regresar 5. Seleccione Prueba de red para comprobar la conectividad de la red. Configuración de red inalámbrica-Config. manual 1. Configure Tipo de red como Inalámbrico. Configuración de red inalámbrica Config. protocolo Internet 2. Selección Configuración de red inalámbrica. : Config. manual ▶ Prueba de red 3. Configure Config. protocolo Internet como Config. manual. 4. Configure Dirección IP, Máscara de subred, Puerta de enlace y Servidor DNS. N Pulse los botones numéricos del mando a distancia para configurar la red manualmente. Seleccionar una red : AP1 Dirección IP : 0 0 0 0 Máscara de subred : 0 0 0 0 Puerta de enlace : 0 0 0 0 Servidor DNS : 0 0 0 0 U Mover E Ingresar R Regresar 5. Seleccione una red mediante Seleccionar una red. 6. Seleccione Prueba de red para comprobar la conectividad de la red. Español - 36 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 36 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:56 ENTRADA / AYUDA ¦ Menú de entrada ❑ Lista de Entradas ■ Tv / Av / Componente / PC / HDMI1/DvI / HDMI2 / HDMI / HDMI4 / USB N Puede elegir solamente los dispositivos externos que estén conectados al televisor. En Lista de Entradas, las entradas conectadas se resaltan y se ordenan en la parte superior. Las entradas que no están conectadas se ordenan en la parte inferior. N Si hay dispositivos USB conectados a los terminales USB 1 (HDD) y USB 2, aparecen como USB1 y USB 2 en orden. N PC siempre está activado. N Uso de los botones de colores del mando a distancia con la lista de fuentes Rojo (Actualizar): actualiza los dispositivos externos conectados. Púlselo si la fuente está activada y conectada pero no se muestra en la lista. TOOLS (Herramientas): Muestra los menús Editar Nombre e Información. Entrada Úselo para seleccionar TV u otras fuentes de entrada externas como reproductores de DVD/ Blu-ray o receptores de cable o satélite (decodificadores), conectados al televisor. Permite seleccionar la fuente de entrada que se prefiera. O Pulse el botón SOURCE del mando a distancia para ver una fuente de señal externa. ListadeEntradas EditarNombre ListadeEntradas TV PC :---- AV Componente HDMI1/DVI HDMI2 :---:---:---:---- ActualizarTHerramientas ❑ Editar Nombre ■ Video / DVD / Cable STB / Satélite STB / PVR STB / Receptor AV / Juego / Filmadora / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DvD / DMA Dé un nombre al dispositivo conectado en las tomas de entrada; de esta manera será más fácil seleccionar el dispositivo de entrada. N Si un PC con una resolución de 1920 x 1080 a 60 Hz se conecta al puerto HDMI IN 1(DvI), se debe configurar el modo HDMI1/DvI como DvI PC en la opción Editar Nombre del modo Entrada. N Cuando se conecta un cable HDMI/DVI al puerto HDMI IN 1(DvI), se debe establecer el modo HDMI1/DvI como DvI o DvI PC en Editar Nombre del modo de Entrada. En este caso, se necesita una conexión de sonido independiente. ¦ Menú de ayuda ❑ Aviso legal ❑ Guía del producto La guía del producto proporciona información sobre las características más importantes del televisor. Las descripciones proporcionadas en esta función sólo están en inglés. Soportetécnico Ver el aviso legal y el descargo de responsabilidad relacionados con los contenidos y el servicio de terceros. N El descargo de responsabilidad puede variar según el país. Avisolegal ▶ Guíadelproducto Autodiagnóstico Actualizacióndelsoftware GuíadeconexiónHD ContactoconSamsung Español - 7 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 37 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:56 Uso de los botones del mando a distancia en el menú Guía del producto. Botón Botón amarillo Rueda (◄/►) ENTERE RETURN EXIT Función Muestra el contenido de Guía del producto de forma secuencial. (Reproducción automática) Mover el cursor y seleccionar una opción. Seleccionar la opción marcada. Volver al menú anterior. Detener la función actual y volver al menú principal de Guía del producto. ❑ Autodiagnóstico ■ Prueba de imagen Si cree que tiene un problema con la imagen, efectúe la prueba de imagen. Compruebe el patrón del color en la pantalla para ver si persiste el problema. ● Sí: Si no se muestra el patrón de prueba o hay ruido en el patrón de prueba, seleccione Sí. Puede haber un problema en el televisor. Puede haber un problema en el televisor. Póngase en contacto con el Centro de llamadas para recibir ayuda. ● No: Si el patrón de prueba se muestra correctamente, seleccione No. Puede haber un problema en el equipo externo. Compruebe las conexiones. Si el problema continúa, consulte el manual del usuario de los dispositivos externos. Autodiagnóstico Prueba de imagen ▶ Prueba de sonido Intensidad de Señal U Mover E Ingresar R Regresar ■ Prueba de sonido Si cree que tiene un problema con el sonido, efectúe la prueba de sonido. Puede comprobar el sonido reproduciendo el sonido de una melodía incorporada a través del televisor. N Si no oye sonido a través de los altavoces del televisor, antes de realizar la prueba de sonido compruebe que Seleccionar altavoz está configurado como Altavoz de TV en el menú Sonido. N La melodía se debe oír durante la prueba aunque Seleccionar altavoz esté establecido en Altavoz externo o se haya silenciado el sonido con el botón MUTE. ● Sí: Si durante la prueba de sonido sólo se oye sonido de un altavoz o no se oye sonido en ninguno, seleccione Sí. Puede haber un problema en el televisor. Póngase en contacto con el Centro de llamadas para recibir ayuda. ● No: Si desde los altavoces no se oye sonido, seleccione No. Puede haber un problema en el equipo externo. Compruebe las conexiones. Si el problema continúa, consulte el manual del usuario de los dispositivos externos. ■ Intensidad de Señal (sólo canales digitales) A diferencia de los canales analógicos, en los que puede variar la calidad de la recepción desde 'con nieve' hasta nítida, los canales digitales (HDTV) tienen una calidad de recepción nítida o no hay recepción. Por ello, a diferencia de los canales analógicos, no se puede realizar una sintonización fina de un canal digital. Se puede, no obstante, ajustar la antena para mejorar la recepción de los canales digitales disponibles. N Si el medidor de la intensidad de la señal indica que ésta es débil, mueva la antena para aumentar la intensidad de la señal. Siga ajustando la antena hasta que encuentre la mejor posición para recibir la señal más fuerte. Español - 38 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 38 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:56 ❑ Actualización del software Samsung puede ofrecer actualizaciones para el firmware del televisor en el futuro. Estas actualizaciones se pueden llevar a cabo a través del televisor cuando se conecta a Internet o mediante la descarga del nuevo firmware de samsung.com al dispositivo de memoria USB. N Versión actual es el software ya instalado en el televisor. N Software alternativo (copia de seguridad) muestra la versión anterior que se sustituirá. N El software se representa como ‘Año/Mes/Fecha_Versión’. Cuanto más reciente sea la fecha, más nueva será la versión de software. Se recomienda la instalación de la última versión. ■ Por USB Inserte una unidad USB que contenga la actualización del firmware descargado de samsung. com. No desconecte la alimentación ni extraiga la unidad USB mientras se aplican las actualizaciones. El televisor se apagará y se encenderá automáticamente después de completar la actualización del firmware. Compruebe la versión del firmware después de que hayan terminado las actualizaciones (la nueva versión tendrá un número superior a la anterior). Cuando se actualiza el software, la configuración del vídeo y audio que se haya efectuado vuelve a la configuración predeterminada (de fábrica). Es aconsejable anotar la configuración para recuperarla fácilmente después de la actualización. Panel posterior del TV o Unidad USB Actualización del software Versión actual 2009/01/17_000001 Por USB ▶ En línea Software alternativo 2009/01/16_000000 U Mover E Ingresar R Regresar ■ En línea Actualiza el Software usando Internet. N Primero, configure la red. Para conocer el procedimiento detallado sobre cómo usar la Configuración de red, consulte las instrucciones de ‘Configuración de la red’. (consulte la páginas 34~36) N Si la conexión a Internet no funciona adecuadamente, se puede interrumpir; vuelva a intentar la descarga. Si el problema persiste, haga la descarga mediante USB y lleve a cabo la actualización. ■ Software alternativo (copia de seguridad) Si hay problemas con el nuevo firmware que afecta al funcionamiento, puede cambiar el software a la versión anterior. N Si se ha cambiado el software, se muestra el software existente. N Puede cambiar el software actual a uno alternativo mediante Software alternativo. ❑ Guía de conexión HD Este menú presenta el método de conexión que proporciona la mejor calidad de imagen en el televisor de alta definición. Consulte esta información cuando conecte dispositivos externos al televisor. ❑ Contacto con Samsung Revise esta información cuando el televisor no funcione correctamente o cuando desee actualizar el software. Puede ver la información relacionada con el centro de llamadas, el producto y el método de descarga del archivo de software. Español - 39 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 39 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:56 Media Play (USB & DLNA) ¦ Conexión de un dispositivo USB 1. Pulse el botón POWER para encender el televisor. 2. Conecte un dispositivo USB que contenga archivos de fotos, música o películas al terminal USB 1 (HDD) o USB 2 del lateral del televisor. Panel posterior del TV 3. Cuando se muestre la pantalla de selección Aplicaciones, pulse el botón o ENTERE para seleccionar Media Play (USB & DLNA). N MTP (Protocolo de transferencia de recursos) no se admite. N El sistema de archivos admite FAT16, FAT32 y NTFS. Unidad USB N Ciertos tipos de cámara digital USB y dispositivos de audio quizás no sean compatibles con este televisor. N Media Play sólo admite dispositivos USB de clase de almacenamiento SUM masivo (MSC). MSC es un dispositivo de clase de almacenamiento masivo sólo de transporte de gran capacidad. Ejemplos de MSC son las unidades de almacenamiento en miniatura, los lectores de tarjetas Flash y las unidades de PHOTO disco duro de USB (no se admiten concentradores de USB). N Conecte directamente al puerto USB del televisor. Si utiliza una conexión con un cable independiente, puede haber problemas de compatibilidad con el USB. Photo Music Movie Setup N Antes de conectar el dispositivo al televisor, haga una copia de seguridad de e Salir Dispositivo SUM sus archivos para evitar daños o pérdidas de datos. SAMSUNG no se hace responsable por cualquier daño en los archivos o pérdida de datos. N Conecte un disco duro de USB al puerto reservado, el puerto USB 1 (HDD). Advertencia: No supere los 1.5 amperios. N No desconecte el dispositivo USB mientras se esté cargando. N MSC admite archivos MP3, JPEG y de película, mientras que un dispositivo PTP admite sólo archivos JPEG. N Cuanto mayor sea la resolución de la imagen, más tiempo tardará en visualizarse en la pantalla. N La resolución JPEG máxima admitida es 15360 x 8640 píxeles. N Con archivos dañados o que no se admiten, se muestra el mensaje ‘Formato de archivo no admitido’. N Si la clave de clasificación se establece en Vista básica, se pueden mostrar hasta 1000 archivos en cada carpeta. La otra clave de clasificación puede mostrar hasta 10000 archivos. N Los archivos MP3 con DRM descargados desde un sitio de pago no se pueden reproducir. La tecnología Gestión de derechos digitales (DRM) admite la creación de contenidos, la distribución y gestión de éstos de modo integrado y general, incluida la protección de los derechos e intereses de los proveedores de los contenidos, la prevención de copias ilegales de los contenidos, así como la gestión de cobros y ac42uerdos. N Cuando se desplaza a una foto, la carga puede tardar varios segundos. En este punto, aparecerá en la pantalla el icono de carga. N Si hay más de 2 dispositivos PTP conectados, sólo se mostrará uno. N Si hay más de un dispositivo MSC conectado, alguno de ellos quizás no se reconozca. Si un dispositivo exige mucha energía (más de 500mA o 5 V), el dispositivo USB quizás no se admita. N Si se muestra un mensaje de advertencia de sobrecarga (error en la adición de nuevo dispositivo por la sobrecarga de alimentación de USB 1 / USB 2) cuando conecta o usa un dispositivo USB, es posible que éste no se reconozca o que funcione mal. 851.86MB/993.02MB libre Español - 40 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 40 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:57 Uso de los botones del mando a distancia en el menú Media Play. Botón Rueda (▲/▼/◄/►) ENTERE ∂/∑ RETURN TOOLS ∫ π/μ INFO MEDIA.P z, EXIT, TV Función Mover el cursor y seleccionar una opción. Seleccionar la opción marcada. Mientras se está reproduciendo una presentación de diapositivas, una película o un archivo de música: - Pulsando el botón ENTERE durante la reproducción se hace una pausa en ésta. - Pulsando el botón ENTERE durante la reproducción se reanuda ésta. Reproducir o interrumpir el archivo de presentación de diapositivas, de película o de música. Volver al menú anterior. Ejecutar diversas funciones desde los menús de fotos, música y película. Detener el archivo de presentación de diapositivas, música o película. Saltar al grupo anterior/Saltar al grupo siguiente. Mostrar información del archivo. Salir del modo Media Play. Detener el modo Media Play y volver al modo TV. ¦ Funciones del reproductor multimedia Permite ver y escuchar archivos de fotos, música o películas guardados en un dispositivo de clase de almacenamiento masivo USB (MSC). Acceso al menú Media Play (USB & DLNA) 1. Pulse el botón MENU. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Aplicaciones y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. SUM 851.86MB/993.02MB libre PHOTO 2. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Media Play (USB & DLNA) y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Se muestra el menú Media Play (USB & DLNA). Photo SUM Music Movie Setup R Regresar Dispositivo O Pulse el botón MEDIA.P del mando a distancia para que se muestre el menú Media Play. O Pulse el botón SOURCE del mando a distancia para ver la lista de fuentes. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar USB. RF 3. Pulse el botón rojo y, a continuación, ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar la memoria TV o USB. Pulse el botón ENTERE. N Estas función difiere según el tipo de dispositivo: memoria TV/USB/DLNA. N El nombre del dispositivo USB seleccionado aparece en la parte inferior izquierda de la pantalla. 4. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar un icono (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup) y, a continuación, pulse el botón RF ENTERE. N Para salir del modo Media Play, pulse el botón MEDIA.P del mando a distancia. Español - 41 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 41 2009-07-28 �� 11:30:57 Extracción segura del dispositivo de memoria USB Se puede quitar el dispositivo del televisor con seguridad. Color 1. Pulse el botón TOOLS en la pantalla de la lista de archivos del reproductor multimedia o mientras se está reproduciendo un presentación de diapositivas, música o una película. 2. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Retirar con seg y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Carpeta Preferencias 5/15 1231.jpg 1232.jpg 1233.jpg 3. Retire el dispositivo USB del televisor. SUM Dispositivo 1234.jpg Vista básica Fecha Secuencia Copiar Repr. grupo actual Copiar grupo actual 1236.jpg 1235.jpg Información Retirar con seg 1237.jpg conf fav Selección T Herramientas R Regresar Pantalla de visualización Color Carpeta 1Vista básica Preferencias Sección de la lista de teclas de clasificación Fecha Sección de la lista de grupos 2 5/15 c Sección de la lista de archivos 1231.jpg 1232.jpg 1233.jpg 1235.jpg 1234.jpg 1236.jpg 1237.jpg 3 6 SUM 4 Dispositivo 5 1Archivos selecc. conf fav Selección T Herramientas R Regresar Vaya a ‘Sección de la lista de teclas de clasificación’, ‘Sección de la lista de grupos’ o ‘Sección de la lista de archivos’ con los botones arriba/abajo. Después de seleccionar una sección, pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar un elemento. 1 Tecla de clasificación actual: Este campo muestra la norma actual de la clasificación de archivos. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para cambiar la norma de clasificación de archivos. 2 Ver grupos: Muestra en detalle los grupos de archivos clasificados de acuerdo con la tecla de clasificación seleccionada. El grupo de clasificación que incluye el archivo seleccionado se resalta. 3 Archivo actualmente seleccionado: Sólo se puede controlar el archivo seleccionado. Los archivos de fotos y películas se muestran como miniaturas. 4 Dispositivo actual: Muestra el nombre del dispositivo actualmente seleccionado. Pulse el botón rojo para seleccionar un dispositivo. Botón rojo (Dispositivo): Selecciona un dispositivo conectado. 5 Elementos de ayuda Botón verde (conf fav): Cambia la configuración de favorito del archivo seleccionado. Pulse este botón varias veces hasta que se muestre el valor que desee. Botón amarillo (Selección): Selecciona un archivo en la lista de archivos. Los archivos seleccionados se marcan con un símbolo c. Vuelva a pulsar el botón amarillo para cancelar la selección del archivo. TOOLS (Herramientas): Muestra los menús de opciones. (El menú de opciones cambia de acuerdo con el estado actual.) 6 Información de selección del elemento: Muestra el número de archivos que se han seleccionado mediante la pulsación del botón amarillo. Español - 42 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 42 2009-07-28 �� 11:31:00 ¦ Clasificación de la lista de fotos Se pueden clasificar las fotos de la Lista de fotos según una norma particular. Color 1. Pulse el botón MEDIA.P. Carpeta Preferencias 2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar Photo y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 3. Pulse el botón ▲ para ir a la sección de las teclas de clasificación. Vista básica Fecha 5/15 1231.jpg 4. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar una norma de clasificación. (Vista básica, Fecha, Color, Carpeta, Preferencias) N La fotos se clasifican según la nueva norma de clasificación seleccionada. SUM 1232.jpg 1233.jpg Dispositivo 1234.jpg 1235.jpg 1236.jpg 1237.jpg conf fav Selección T Herramientas R Regresar 5. Pulse el botón ▼ para ir a la sección de la lista de archivos. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir)/ENTERE para iniciar la presentación en el orden elegido. N Para ir al grupo anterior o siguiente, pulse el botón π (REW) o μ (FF). N La información de la foto se establece automáticamente. La información del color extraída del archivo de foto puede diferir de la que espera el usuario. Puede cambiar el color y la preferencia. N PTP no admite el modo de clasificación de la carpeta. ❑ Vista básica Muestra las carpetas del dispositivo de memoria USB. Si selecciona una carpeta y pulsa el botón ENTERE, sólo se muestran los archivos de fotos incluidos en la carpeta seleccionada. N Cuando se clasifican según la Vista básica, no se pueden configurar los archivos favoritos. ❑ Fecha Ordena las fotos por fecha. Ordena por años y meses empezando por las más antiguas. ❑ Color → Rojo / Amarillo / Verde / Azul / Magenta / Negro / Gris / Sin clasificar Ordena las fotos por color. Puede cambiar la información del color de la foto. N Debe activar Usar vista color en el menú Setup antes de ordenar las fotos por color. ❑ Carpeta Ordena las fotos por carpeta. Si hay varias carpetas en el USB, los archivos de fotos se muestran ordenados en cada carpeta. El archivo de fotos de la carpeta raíz se muestra primero y los otros se muestran ordenados alfabéticamente por nombre. ❑ Preferencias → FFF /FFF /FFF /FFF Ordena las fotos por preferencias (favoritos). Puede cambiar las preferencias de las fotos. N Cambio de la configuracion de favoritos. Seleccione una foto en la sección de la lista de archivos y pulse varias veces el botón verde hasta que aparezca la opción deseada. N Se pueden seleccionar hasta 3 estrellas. N Las estrellas indican sólo una agrupación. Por ejemplo, la configuración de 3 estrellas no tiene prioridad alguna sobre la de una estrella. Español - 43 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 43 2009-07-28 �� 11:31:02 ¦ Menú de opciones de la lista de fotos 1. Pulse el botón MEDIA.P. Vista básica Fecha 2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar Photo y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 3. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de fotos deseado. N Selección de varias fotos Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de fotos deseado. A continuación pulse el botón amarillo. Repita el proceso anterior para seleccionar varios archivos de fotos. Junto al archivo de fotos seleccionado aparece la marca c. Carpeta Preferencias Color 5/15 1231.jpg 1232.jpg SUM 1233.jpg Dispositivo 1234.jpg Secuencia Copiar Repr. grupo actual Cambiar info grupo 1236.jpg 1237.jpg 1235.jpggrupo actual Copiar Información ▼ conf fav Selección T Herramientas R Regresar 4. Pulse el botón TOOLS. N El menú de opciones cambia de acuerdo con el estado actual. ❑ Secuencia Con este menú puede realizar una presentación de diapositivas de los archivos de fotos del dispositivo de memoria USB. ❑ Copiar / Copiar grupo actual / Copiar archivo selecc. (Si hay varios archivos seleccionados) Seleccione la foto que desee copiar. (Otra opción es seleccionar varios archivos con el botón amarillo.) Pulse el botón TOOLS para seleccionar Copiar (o Copiar grupo actual / Copiar archivo selecc.). Los archivos del dispositivo USB se guardan en la memoria del TV. N Sólo puede copiar archivos guardados en el dispositivo USB. N Si la memoria del televisor está llena, los archivos no se pueden copiar. ❑ Borrar / Borrar todo / Borrar archivo sel. (Si hay varios archivos seleccionados) Seleccione la foto que desee borrar. (Otra opción es seleccionar varios archivos con el botón amarillo.) Pulse el botón TOOLS para seleccionar Borrar (o Borrar todo / Borrar archivo sel.). Se eliminan los archivos. N Sólo puede borrar los archivos guardados en la memoria del TV. N No se puede recuperar un archivo suprimido. ❑ Repr. grupo actual Con este menú se puede realizar una presentación de diapositivas de los archivos de fotos del grupo de clasificación actualmente seleccionado. ❑ Cambiar info grupo (Si la tecla de clasificación es Color) Se puede cambiar la información de color de un archivo (o grupo de archivos) de una foto seleccionada para mover ésta de un grupo de color a otro. N Esto no cambia el color real de la foto. N La información del grupo del archivo actual se ha actualizado y las fotos se han movido al nuevo grupo de color. N Para cambiar la información de varios archivos, seleccione los que desee cambiar con el botón amarillo. ❑ Deselecc. todos (Si hay, al menos, un archivo seleccionado) Puede cancelar la selección de todos los archivos. N La marca c indica que el archivo correspondiente seleccionado está oculto. ❑ Información Se muestra la información del archivo de foto: nombre, tamaño, resolución, fecha de modificación y ruta. N Se puede ver la información de los archivos de fotos durante la presentación siguiendo el mismo procedimiento. O Pulse el botón INFO para ver la información. ❑ Retirar con seg Se puede quitar el dispositivo USB del televisor con seguridad. RF Español - 44 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 44 2009-07-28 �� 11:31:04 ¦ Visualización de una foto o una presentación Visualización de una presentación 1. Pulse el botón ▼ para seleccionar la sección de la lista de archivos. Color Carpeta 2. Pulse el botón TOOLS. 3. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Secuencia y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N En la presentación se usan todos los archivos de la sección de la lista de archivos. Botón ENTERE ∂ ∑ ∫ π/μ TOOLS Vista básica 1231.jpg 1232.jpg 1233.jpg 1234.jpg 1234.jpg 580x765 2009/01/02 5/15 E Pausa ◀▶ Ant./Sig. SUM 1237.jpg conf fav Selección T Herramientas R Regresar Dispositivo ▶ Normal Fecha Secuencia Copiar Repr. grupo actual Copiar grupo actual 1236.jpg 1235.jpg Información Retirar con seg 5/15 SUM N En la presentación, los archivos se muestran en orden a partir del archivo que se muestra en este momento. N En la presentación se ejecuta según el orden de la clasificación de la sección de la lista de archivos. N Los archivos se música se pueden reproducir automáticamente durante la presentación si Música de fondo está configurado como Encendido. O Cuando se muestre una lista de fotos, pulse el botón ∂(reproducir)/ENTERE del mando a distancia para iniciar la presentación. N Botones de control de la presentación Preferencias Función Reproducir/hacer una pausa en la presentación. Reproducir la presentación. Hacer una pausa en la presentación. Salir de la presentación y volver a la lista de fotos. Cambiar la velocidad de la reproducción de la presentación. Ejecutar varias funciones de los menús de fotos. T Herramientas R Regresar RF Reproducción del grupo actual 1. Pulse el botón ▲ para ir a la sección de las teclas de clasificación. Color 2. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar una norma de clasificación. Carpeta Preferencias 3. Pulse el botón ▼ para ir a la sección de la lista de grupos. ● Otra posibilidad Fecha 5/15 4. Seleccione un grupo con los botones ◄ y ►. 5. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir). Se inicia la presentación de diapositivas de los archivos del grupo seleccionado. Vista básica 1231.jpg SUM 1232.jpg 1233.jpg Dispositivo 1234.jpg 1235.jpg 1236.jpg 1237.jpg conf fav Selección T Herramientas R Regresar 1. Seleccione una tecla de clasificación y, en la sección de la lista de archivos, seleccione las fotos del grupo que desee. N Para ir al grupo anterior o siguiente, pulse el botón π (REW) o µ (FF). 2. Pulse el botón TOOLS. 3. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Repr. grupo actual y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N En la presentación se usan sólo las fotos del grupo de clasificación que incluye los archivos seleccionados. Español - 45 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 45 2009-07-28 �� 11:31:07 Para ver una presentación sólo con los archivos seleccionados 1. Pulse el botón ▼ para seleccionar la sección de la lista de archivos. 2. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar la foto que desee en la sección de la lista de archivos. 3. Pulse el botón amarillo. 4. Repita el proceso anterior para seleccionar varias fotos. N La marca c aparece a la izquierda de la foto seleccionada. N Si selecciona sólo un archivo, la presentación no se efectuará. N Para cancelar la selección de los archivos, pulse el botón TOOLS y seleccione Deselecc. todos. 5. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir)/ENTERE. N Los archivos seleccionados se usan en la presentación. ● Otra posibilidad 1. En la sección de la lista de archivos, pulse el botón amarillo para seleccionar las fotos deseadas. 2. Pulse el botón TOOLS. 3. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Secuencia y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Los archivos seleccionados se usan en la presentación. ¦ Menú de opciones de la presentación de diapositivas 1. Durante una presentación (o la visualización de una foto), pulse el botón TOOLS para establecer una opción. 2. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar la opción deseada y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. Herramientas Detener visionado automático Veloc.vis.aut : Efecto de secuencia : Normal Fundido 1 Girar Zoom Música de fondo ❑ Detener visionado automático / Inic. vis. aut. Configuración de la imagen Configuración del sonido Se puede iniciar o detener una presentación. Información ▼ U Mover E Ingresar e Salir ❑ Veloc.vis.aut → Lento / Normal / Rápido Se puede seleccionar la velocidad de la presentación. N Esta función está disponible sólo durante la presentación. N Durante la presentación, también se puede cambiar la velocidad de ésta pulsando el botón π (REW) o μ (FF). ❑ Efecto de secuencia Puede seleccionar los efectos de transición de pantalla que se utilizan en la presentación. ■ Ninguno / Fundido 1 / Fundido 2 / Persiana / Espiral / Tablero / Lineal / Escaleras / Cortinilla / Al azar N Esta función está disponible sólo durante la presentación. ❑ Girar Puede girar las fotos guardadas en el dispositivo de memoria USB. N Con cada pulsación del botón ◄ , la imagen gira 270˚, 180˚, 90˚ y 0˚. N Con cada pulsación del botón ► , la imagen gira 90˚, 180˚, 270˚ y 0˚. N El archivo girado no se guarda. Español - 46 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 46 2009-07-28 �� 11:31:07 ❑ Zoom Puede ampliar las fotos guardadas en el dispositivo de memoria USB. (x1 → x2 → x4) N Para mover una foto ampliada, pulse el botón ENTERE y, a continuación, los botones ▲/▼/◄/►. Tenga en cuenta que si una imagen ampliada es menor que el tamaño de la pantalla original, la función de cambio de ubicación no está operativa. N El archivo ampliado no se guarda. ❑ Música de fondo Puede seleccionar una música de fondo para la presentación. N Para usar esta función, en el dispositivo USB debe haber archivos de música y fotos almacenados. ■ Música de fondo → Apagado / Encendido ● Apagado: La música de fondo no se reproduce. ● Encendido: Cuando la música de fondo está disponible, si selecciona Encendido, la música se reproducirá. ■ Modo BGM → Ánimo / Arch. Sel. / Mezcla Puede seleccionar un modo para utilizarlo como música de fondo. ■ Estado anímico BGM → Dinámico / Rítmico / Triste / Excitante / Tranquilo / Sin clasificar Se reproducirá como fondo la música con el estilo seleccionado. N Si configura Modo BGM como Ánimo, puede seleccionar un estilo. ■ Seleccionar archivo de música (1 Archivos selecc.) Sólo el archivo de música seleccionado se configura como música de fondo. N Si configura Modo BGM como Arch. Sel., puede seleccionar un archivo de música. ❑ Configuración de la imagen / Configuración del sonido Puede seleccionar la configuración de la imagen y el sonido. ❑ Información Se muestra la información del archivo de foto. ❑ Retirar con seg Se puede quitar el dispositivo USB del televisor con seguridad. Español - 47 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 47 2009-07-28 �� 11:31:07 ¦ Clasificación de la lista de música Se pueden clasificar los archivos de música de la lista según una norma particular. Género 1. Pulse el botón MEDIA.P. Carpeta 2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar Music y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 3. Pulse el botón ▲ para ir a la sección de las teclas de clasificación. 4. Pulse el botón ◄ o► para seleccionar una norma de clasificación. (Vista básica, Título, Artista, Ánimo, Género, Carpeta, Preferencias) N Los archivos de música se clasifican según la nueva norma de clasificación seleccionada. Preferencias Dinámico Lies SUM Vista básica Título 3/37 Glen Hans Once Ost 2007 Soundtrack Want Me Way Dispositivo I Love You HaHaHa Gold Shine conf fav Selección T Herramientas R Regresar 5. Pulse el botón ▼ para ir a la sección de la lista de archivos. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir) / ENTERE para iniciar la reproducción de música en el orden elegido. N Para ir al grupo anterior o siguiente, pulse el botón π (REW) o μ (FF). N La información de la música se establece automáticamente. La información del estado de ánimo extraída de un archivo de música puede diferir de la que el usuario espera. Puede cambiar el tipo y la preferencia. N Si no hay información del título de un archivo de música, se muestra el nombre del archivo. N Si la información de artista, álbum, año o género no está disponible, el elemento correspondiente se muestra vacío. ❑ Vista básica Muestra las carpetas del dispositivo de memoria USB. Si selecciona una carpeta y pulsa el botón ENTERE, sólo se muestran los archivos de música incluidos en la carpeta seleccionada. N Cuando se clasifican según la Vista básica, no se pueden configurar los archivos favoritos. ❑ Título Clasifica los títulos de música según el símbolo, el número, alfabéticamente y orden especial, y muestra el archivo de música. ❑ Artista Ordena los archivos de música por artista según el símbolo, el número, alfabéticamente y orden especial. ❑ Ánimo → Dinámico / Rítmico / Triste / Excitante / Tranquilo / Sin clasificar Ordena los archivos de música por el tipo de estado de ánimo. Puede cambiar la información del tipo de música. ❑ Género Ordena los archivos de música por género. ❑ Carpeta Ordena los archivos de música por carpeta. Si hay varias carpetas en el USB, los archivos se muestran ordenados en cada carpeta. El archivo de música en la carpeta raíz se muestra primero y los otros se muestran ordenados alfabéticamente por nombre. ❑ Preferencias → FFF /FFF /FFF /FFF Ordena los archivos de música por preferencias (favoritos). Puede cambiar las preferencias de los archivos de música. N Cambio de la configuración de favoritos Seleccione un archivo de música en la sección de la lista de archivos y pulse varias veces el botón verde hasta que aparezca la opción deseada. N Se pueden seleccionar hasta 3 estrellas. N Las estrellas indican sólo una agrupación. Por ejemplo, la configuración de 3 estrellas no tiene prioridad alguna sobre la de una estrella. Español - 48 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 48 2009-07-28 �� 11:31:08 ¦ Menú de opciones de la lista de música 1. Pulse el botón MEDIA.P. 2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar Music y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 3. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de música que desee. N Selección de varios archivos de música Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de música que desee. A continuación pulse el botón amarillo. Repita el proceso anterior para seleccionar varios archivos de música. Junto al archivo de música seleccionado aparece la marca c. Género Carpeta Preferencias Glen Hans Once Ost 2007 Soundtrack Want Me SUM Way Dispositivo Título Repr. grupo actual Copiar Copiar grupo actual Información Gold HaHaHa con seg Retirar 3/37 Dinámico Lies Vista básica I Love You Shine conf fav Selección T Herramientas R Regresar 4. Pulse el botón TOOLS. N El menú de opciones cambia de acuerdo con el estado actual. ❑ Repr. grupo actual Con este menú sólo puede reproducir archivos de música del grupo de clasificación actualmente seleccionado. ❑ Copiar / Copiar grupo actual / Copiar archivo selecc. (Si hay varios archivos seleccionados) Seleccione la música que desee copiar. (Otra opción es seleccionar varios archivos con el botón amarillo.) Pulse el botón TOOLS para seleccionar Copiar (o Copiar grupo actual / Copiar archivo selecc.). Los archivos del dispositivo USB se guardan en la memoria del TV. N Sólo puede copiar archivos guardados en el dispositivo USB. N Si la memoria del televisor está llena, los archivos no se pueden copiar. ❑ Borrar / Borrar todo / Borrar archivo sel. (Si hay varios archivos seleccionados) Seleccione el archivo que desee borrar. (Otra opción es seleccionar varios archivos con el botón amarillo.) Pulse el botón TOOLS para seleccionar Borrar (o Borrar todo / Borrar archivo sel.). Se eliminan los archivos. N Sólo puede borrar los archivos guardados en la memoria del TV. N No se puede recuperar un archivo suprimido. ❑ Cambiar info grupo (Si la tecla de clasificación es Ánimo) Puede cambiar la información del tipo de música. La información del grupo del archivo actual se ha actualizado y el archivo se ha movido al nuevo grupo. N Para cambiar la información de varios archivos, seleccione éstos con el botón amarillo. ❑ Deselecc. todos (Si hay, al menos, un archivo seleccionado) Puede cancelar la selección de todos los archivos. N La marca c indica que el archivo correspondiente seleccionado está oculto. ❑ Información Se muestra la información del archivo de música: nombre, tamaño, fecha de modificación y ruta. N Puede ver la información de los archivos de música al Repr. grupo actual con el mismo procedimiento. O Pulse el botón INFO para ver la información. ❑ Retirar con seg Se puede quitar el dispositivo USB del televisor con seguridad. RF Español - 49 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 49 2009-07-28 �� 11:31:09 ¦ Reproducción de música Reproducción de un archivo de música 1. Pulse el botón ▼ para seleccionar la sección de la lista de archivos. 2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de música que desee. ▶ 00:00:04 / 00:04:04 3/37 Way I Love You HaHaHa 3. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir)/ENTERE. N Este menú sólo muestra archivos con la extensión MP3. Los archivos con otras extensiones no se muestran, aunque se hayan guardado en el mismo dispositivo USB. N El archivo seleccionado se visualiza en la parte superior con su tiempo de E Pausa ◀▶ Ant./Sig. T Herramientas R Regresar SUM reproducción. N Para ajustar el volumen de la música, pulse el botón del volumen del mando a distancia. Para silenciar el sonido, pulse el botón MUTE del mando a distancia. N Si, al reproducir archivos MP3, el sonido no se oye correctamente, ajuste Ecualizador y SRS TruSurround HD en el menú Sonido. (Un archivo MP3 con una modulación excesiva puede causar problemas de sonido.) N La duración de la reproducción de un archivo de música puede visualizarse como ‘00:00:00’ si la información del tiempo de reproducción no se encuentra al inicio del archivo. N π (REW) o μ (FF) no funcionan durante la reproducción. N Botones de control de la reproducción de música Botón ENTERE ∂ ∑ ∫ TOOLS Función Reproducir/hacer una pausa en el archivo de música. Reproducir el archivo de música. Hacer una pausa en el archivo de música. Salir del modo de reproducción y volver a la lista de música. Ejecutar varias funciones de los menús de música. N Icono de información de la función de la música p q Cuando todos los archivos de música de la carpeta (o el archivo seleccionado) se repiten. Modo rep. está Encendido. Cuando todos los archivos de música de la carpeta (o el archivo seleccionado) se reproducen una vez. Modo rep. está Apagado. Reproducción de un grupo de música 1. Pulse el botón ▲ para ir a la sección de las teclas de clasificación. 2. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar una norma de clasificación. 3. Pulse el botón ▼ o ENTERE para ir a la sección de la lista de grupos. 4. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir). Se inicia la reproducción de los archivos del grupo seleccionado. ● Otra posibilidad 1 Seleccione una tecla de clasificación y en la sección de la lista de archivos seleccione los archivos del grupo que desee. N Para ir al grupo anterior o siguiente, pulse el botón π (REW) o µ (FF). 2. Pulse el botón TOOLS. 3. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Repr. grupo actual y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Se reproducen los archivos de música incluidos en el archivo seleccionado. Reproducción de archivos de música seleccionados 1. Pulse el botón ▼ para seleccionar la sección de la lista de archivos. 2. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de música que desee. 3. Pulse el botón amarillo. 4. Repita el proceso anterior para seleccionar varios archivos de música. N La marca c aparece a la izquierda del archivo de música seleccionado. N Para cancelar la selección de los archivos, pulse el botón TOOLS y seleccione Deselecc. todos. 5. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir)/ENTERE. N Se reproducen los archivos seleccionados. Español - 50 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 50 2009-07-28 �� 11:31:09 ¦ Menú de opciones de la reproducción de música Menú de opciones de la reproducción de música Herramientas ❑ Modo rep. → Encendido / Apagado Modo rep. ◀ Encendido ▶ Configuración de la imagen Puede reproducir archivos de música repetidamente. Configuración del sonido Información Retirar con seg ❑ Configuración de la imagen / Configuración del sonido Puede ajustar la configuración de la imagen y del sonido. U Mover L Ajustar e Salir ❑ Información Se muestra la información del archivo de música. ❑ Retirar con seg Se puede quitar el dispositivo USB del televisor con seguridad. ¦ Clasificación de la lista de películas Se pueden clasificar las películas de la Lista de películas según una norma particular. 1. Pulse el botón MEDIA.P. Título Carpeta Preferencias 2. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Movie y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 3. Pulse el botón ▲ para ir a la sección de las teclas de clasificación. 4. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar una norma de clasificación. (Vista básica, Fecha, Título, Carpeta, Preferencias) N Los archivos de películas se clasifican según la nueva norma de clasificación seleccionada. Vista básica Fecha 5/15 1231.avi SUM 1232.avi 1233.avi Dispositivo ABCD.avi 1235.avi 1236.avi 1237.avi conf fav Selección T Herramientas R Regresar 5. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir)/ENTERE para iniciar la reproducción de la película en el orden elegido. N La información de la película se establece automáticamente. Puede cambiar las preferencias. ❑ Vista básica Muestra las carpetas del dispositivo de memoria USB. Si selecciona una carpeta y pulsa el botón ENTERE, sólo se muestran los archivos de películas incluidos en la carpeta seleccionada. N Cuando se clasifican según la Vista básica, no se pueden configurar los archivos favoritos. ❑ Fecha Ordena las películas por fecha. Ordena por años y meses empezando por las películas más antiguas. ❑ Título Ordena y muestra los títulos de películas según el símbolo, el número, alfabéticamente y orden especial. ❑ Carpeta Si hay varias carpetas en el USB, los archivos de película se muestran ordenados en cada carpeta. El archivo de películas de la carpeta raíz se muestra primero y los otros se muestran ordenados alfabéticamente por nombre. ❑ Preferencias → FFF /FFF /FFF /FFF Ordena las películas por preferencias. (Favoritos) Puede cambiar las preferencias de las películas. N Cambio de la configuración de favoritos Seleccione un archivo de película en la sección de la lista de archivos y pulse varias veces el botón verde hasta que aparezca la opción deseada. N Se pueden seleccionar hasta 3 estrellas. N Las estrellas indican sólo una agrupación. Por ejemplo, la configuración de 3 estrellas no tiene prioridad alguna sobre la de una estrella. Español - 51 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 51 2009-07-28 �� 11:31:11 ¦ Menú de opciones de la lista de películas 1. Pulse el botón MEDIA.P. Título 2. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Movie y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 3. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de película que desee. N Selección de varios archivos de películas Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de película que desee. A continuación pulse el botón amarillo. Repita el proceso anterior para seleccionar varios archivos de películas. Junto al archivo de película seleccionado aparece la marca c. Carpeta Preferencias 5/15 1231.avi 1232.avi SUM 1233.avi Dispositivo ABCD.avi Vista básica Fecha Repr. grupo actual Copiar Copiar grupo actual Información 1236.avi 1235.avi con seg Retirar 1237.avi conf fav Selección T Herramientas R Regresar 4. Pulse el botón TOOLS. N El menú de opciones cambia de acuerdo con el estado actual. ❑ Repr. grupo actual Con este menú sólo puede reproducir archivos de película del grupo de clasificación actualmente seleccionado. ❑ Copiar / Copiar grupo actual / Copiar archivo selecc. (Si hay varios archivos seleccionados) Seleccione la película que desee copiar. (Otra opción es seleccionar varios archivos con el botón amarillo.) Pulse el botón TOOLS para seleccionar Copiar (o Copiar grupo actual / Copiar archivo selecc.). Los archivos del dispositivo USB se guardan en la memoria del TV. N Sólo puede copiar archivos guardados en el dispositivo USB. N Si la memoria del televisor está llena, los archivos no se pueden copiar. ❑ Borrar / Borrar todo / Borrar archivo sel. (Si hay varios archivos seleccionados) Seleccione el archivo que desee borrar. (Otra opción es seleccionar varios archivos con el botón amarillo.) Pulse el botón TOOLS para seleccionar Borrar (o Borrar todo / Borrar archivo sel.). Se eliminan los archivos. N Sólo puede borrar los archivos guardados en la memoria del TV. N No se puede recuperar un archivo suprimido. ❑ Deselecc. todos (Si hay, al menos, un archivo seleccionado) Puede cancelar la selección de todos los archivos. N La marca c indica que el archivo correspondiente seleccionado está oculto. ❑ Información Se muestra la información del archivo de película: nombre, tamaño, fecha de modificación y ruta. O Pulse el botón INFO para ver la información. ❑ Retirar con seg Se puede quitar el dispositivo USB del televisor con seguridad. ¦ Reproducción de un archivo de película RF Reproducción de un archivo de película 1. Pulse el botón ▼ para seleccionar la sección de la lista de archivos. 2. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de película que desee. ▶ p 00:00:01 / 00:05:30 3/37 ABC.avi 3. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir)/ENTERE. N El archivo seleccionado se reproduce. N El archivo seleccionado se visualiza en la parte superior con su tiempo de reproducción. N La duración de la reproducción de un archivo de película puede visualizarse como ‘00:00:00’ si la información del tiempo de reproducción no se encuentra E Pausa ◀ ▶ Saltar T Herramientas R Regresar SUM al inicio del archivo. N Se pueden reproducir emocionantes archivos multimedia de juegos, pero la función de juego no se admite. Español - 52 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 52 2009-07-28 �� 11:31:12 N Formatos de subtítulo admitidos Nombre Texto basado en tiempo MPEG-4 SAMI SubRip SubViewer Micro DVD Extensión del archivo .ttxt .smi .srt .sub .sub o .txt Formato XML HTML basado en cadenas basado en cadenas basado en cadenas N Formatos de película compatibles Extensión del archivo *.avi Contenedor AVI Decodificador de vídeo Códec de audio Resolución Divx 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 720x576 XviD MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 1920x1080 H.264 BP / MP / HP MPEG4 SP / ASP Motion JPEG *.mkv MKV 800x600 720x576 XviD 1920x1080 H.264 BP / MP / HP MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM 800x600 720x576 H.264 BP / MP / HP MP3 AC3 LPCM ADPCM WMA Motion JPEG *.mp4 *.3gp ASF MP4 (SMP4) 3GPP *.vro VRO VOB *.mpg *.mpeg PS *.ts *.tp *.trp 1920x1080 Motion JPEG MPEG4 SP / ASP *.wmv 1920x1080 Divx 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 XviD ASF 1920x1080 Divx 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 MPEG4 SP / ASP *.asf 1920x1080 VC1 H.264 BP / MP / HP MPEG4 SP / ASP XVID H.264 BP / MP / HP MPEG4 SP / ASP MPEG2 MPEG1 MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2 TS H.264 VC1 1920x1080 1920x1080 1920x1080 800x600 WMA MP3 ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 1920x1080 1920x1080 1920x1080 ADPCM AAC 1920x1080 AC3 MPEG LPCM 1920x1080 AC3 MPEG PCM 1920x1080 AAC MP3 1920x1080 1920x1080 1920x1080 1920x1080 1920x1080 1920x1080 N Botones de control de la reproducción de vídeo Botón ENTERE ∂ ∑ TOOLS ∫ Rueda (◄ / ►) Rueda (▲ / ▼) μ Función Reproducir/hacer una pausa en el archivo de película. Reproducir el archivo de película. Hacer una pausa en el archivo de película. Ejecutar varias funciones de los menús de películas. Salir del modo de reproducción y volver a la lista de películas. Saltar hacia adelante o hacia atrás en el archivo de película. Ir al principio o al final del archivo. Reproducir el archivo a doble velocidad. Según el archivo de película, es posible que esta función no se admita. Español - 53 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 53 2009-07-28 �� 11:31:12 Reproducción de un grupo de películas 1. Pulse el botón ▲ para ir a la sección de las teclas de clasificación. 2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar una norma de clasificación. 3. Pulse el botón ▼ o ENTERE para ir a la sección de la lista de grupos. 4. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir). Sólo se inicia la reproducción de los archivos del grupo seleccionado. ● Otra posibilidad 1 Seleccione una tecla de clasificación y en la sección de la lista de archivos seleccione los archivos del grupo que desee. N Para ir al grupo anterior o siguiente, pulse el botón π (REW) o µ (FF). 2. Pulse el botón TOOLS. 3. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar Repr. grupo actual y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. N Se reproducen los archivos de películas del grupo de ordenación, incluido el archivo seleccionado. Reproducción de archivos de películas seleccionados 1. Pulse el botón ▼ para seleccionar la sección de la lista de archivos. 2. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar el archivo de películas deseado. 3. Pulse el botón amarillo. N La marca c aparece a la izquierda del archivo de película seleccionado. N Para cancelar la selección de los archivos, pulse el botón TOOLS y seleccione Deselecc. todos. 4. Repita el proceso anterior para seleccionar varios archivos de películas. 5. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir)/ENTERE. N Sólo se reproduce el archivo seleccionado. Continuación de la reproducción de una película (reanudar reproducción) Si sale de la función de reproducción de la película, ésta se puede reproducir posteriormente desde el punto en que se detuvo. 1. Seleccione el archivo de la película que desee seguir reproduciendo, pulsando los botones ◄ o ► en la sección de la lista de archivos. 2. Pulse el botón ∂ (reproducir)/ENTERE. 3. Seleccione Contin. (reanudar reproducción) con el botón azul. N La película se reproducirá desde el punto en que se detuvo. N Si la función Recordatorio cont. pelíc. está configurada como Encendido en el menú de Setup, aparecerá un mensaje emergente cuando se reanude la reproducción de un archivo de película. Español - 54 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 54 2009-07-28 �� 11:31:12 ¦ Menús de opciones de la reproducción de películas Menús de opciones de la reproducción de películas ❑ Modo rep. → Encendido / Apagado Puede reproducir archivos de película repetidamente. ❑ Configuración de la imagen / Configuración del sonido Puede ajustar la configuración de la imagen y del sonido. Herramientas Modo rep. ◀ Encendido ▶ Configuración de la imagen Configuración del sonido Imagen Tamaño : Ajustar Configuración subtítulo Información Retirar con seg U Mover L Ajustar e Salir ❑ Imagen Tamaño ■ Ajustar Reproducir vídeo al tamaño de la pantalla del televisor. ■ Original Reproducir vídeo al tamaño original. ❑ Configuración subtítulo Puede configurar los subtítulos de la película. ■ Subtítulo → Encendido / Apagado Puede activar o desactivar los subtítulos de la película. ■ Tamaño subtítulo → Pequeño / Normal / Grande Puede cambiar el tamaño de la letra de los subtítulos. ■ Sincronización subtítulo Puede ajustar la sincronización de los subtítulos. ■ Reiniciar sincr.subtítulo Puede restablecer la sincronización ajustada de los subtítulos. ❑ Información Se muestra la información del archivo de película. ❑ Retirar con seg Se puede quitar el dispositivo del televisor con seguridad. Español - 55 [8500-NA]BN68-02322C-Spa.indb 55 2009-07-28 �� 11:31:12 ¦ Uso del menú de configuración Muestra la configuración del usuario del menú Media Play. SUM 1. Pulse el botón MEDIA.P. 2. Pulse los botones ◄ o ► para seleccionar Setup y, a continuación, pulse el botón ENTERE. 851.86MB/993.02MB libre SETUP 3. Pulse el botón ▲ o ▼ para seleccionar la opción deseada. 4. Pulse el botón ◄ o ► para seleccionar la opción deseada. N Para salir del modo Media Play, pulse el botón MEDIA.P del mando a distancia. ■ ■ ■ Usar vista color → Encendido / Apagado Puede ordenar las fotos por color. Si esta opción se establece en Encendido, el tiempo de carga puede verse aumentado para recoger información de color de las fotos. Recordatorio cont. pelíc. → Encendido / Apagado Seleccionar para mostrar el mensaje de ayuda emergente para la reproducción de una película desde el punto en que se dejó de ver anteriormente. Photo SUM Music Movie Setup e Salir Dispositivo Usar vista color ◀ Apagado Recordatorio cont. pelíc. Encendido Obtener código de registro DivX® VOD ▶ Obtener código de desactivación DivX® VOD Tiempo ejec. protect. pant. 2 hr Información Retirar con seg Si está activado, aumenta el tiempo de carga para la recopilación de la información del color. Obtener codigo de registro de DivX® VOD SUM Dispositivo Muestra el código de registro autorizado para el televisor. Si se conecta al sitio Web DivX® y registra el código de registro con una cuenta personal, puede descargar el archivo de registro VOD. Si reproduce el registro VOD mediante Media Play se completa el registro. N Para obtener más información sobre DivX® VOD, visite www.DivX.com ■ Obtener codigo desactivacion DivX® VOD Si DivX® VOD no está registrado, aparece el código de desactivación de registro. Si ejecuta esta función cuando DivX® VOD se ha registrado, el registro actual de DivX® VOD se desactiva. ■ Tiempo ejec. protect. pant. → 2 hr / 4 hr / 8 hr / 10 hr / Apagado Puede configurar el tiempo de espera necesario para que se ejecute el salvapantallas. ■ Información
advertisement
Key Features
- 55-inch LED display with 1080p resolution
- Stunning visuals with sharp details and vibrant colors
- Crystal-clear audio with built-in speakers
- Smart TV capabilities with access to streaming services
- Voice control with Bixby or Alexa
- Sleek design and innovative features
Related manuals
Frequently Answers and Questions
What is the screen size of the Samsung UN55B8500XF?
55 inches
What is the resolution of the Samsung UN55B8500XF?
1080p
Does the Samsung UN55B8500XF have built-in speakers?
Yes, it has built-in speakers that produce crystal-clear audio.
Is the Samsung UN55B8500XF a Smart TV?
Yes, it is a Smart TV with access to streaming services and other smart features.
Can I control the Samsung UN55B8500XF with my voice?
Yes, you can control it with your voice using Bixby or Alexa.